<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marekpalka</id>
	<title>JustChords Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marekpalka"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Marekpalka"/>
	<updated>2026-10-07T06:44:16Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.45.1</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ICloud_Sync&amp;diff=447</id>
		<title>ICloud Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ICloud_Sync&amp;diff=447"/>
		<updated>2026-09-25T06:29:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Created page with &amp;quot;== iCloud Sync ==  JustChords keeps your songs, setlists, tags, and media in sync across your iPhone, iPad, and Mac using your personal &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;iCloud Drive&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; — no account sign-up and no JustChords servers involved.  === How it works ===  When you&amp;#039;re signed in to iCloud, JustChords stores your library in your iCloud Drive instead of only on the device. Any device signed in to the same iCloud account will see the same songs, setlists, folders, and tags, usually within a few...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== iCloud Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords keeps your songs, setlists, tags, and media in sync across your iPhone, iPad, and Mac using your personal &#039;&#039;&#039;iCloud Drive&#039;&#039;&#039; — no account sign-up and no JustChords servers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How it works ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you&#039;re signed in to iCloud, JustChords stores your library in your iCloud Drive instead of only on the device. Any device signed in to the same iCloud account will see the same songs, setlists, folders, and tags, usually within a few seconds of a change.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Syncing includes:&lt;br /&gt;
* Songs, setlists, folders, and tags&lt;br /&gt;
* Images, PDF notesheets, audio tracks, recordings, and pad sounds attached to your songs&lt;br /&gt;
* A handful of app preferences, such as your custom folder list, instrument list, and section formatting rules&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some settings are &#039;&#039;&#039;per-device&#039;&#039;&#039; on purpose (for example, view and print preferences) and do not sync, since they&#039;re often tuned to the specific device or stage setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Turning it on ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no separate on/off switch for iCloud sync in JustChords. It follows your device&#039;s iCloud sign-in status automatically:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Signed in to iCloud&#039;&#039;&#039; → your library and media sync automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Not signed in, or iCloud unavailable&#039;&#039;&#039; → JustChords keeps working normally, but everything stays local to that device only.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To enable sync, sign in to iCloud in your device&#039;s system Settings and make sure iCloud Drive is turned on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Large files and downloads ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio tracks, recordings, and pad sounds can be large, so they aren&#039;t always downloaded to every device immediately — they sync as &amp;quot;available in iCloud&amp;quot; and download on demand when you open the song that needs them. If a file hasn&#039;t finished downloading yet, JustChords shows a download status until it&#039;s ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your library is still downloading when you open the app, you may briefly see a message that local data is shown while the latest iCloud data finishes loading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== If you edit the same song on two devices ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two devices change the same library file while offline from each other, iCloud detects a conflict once they reconnect. Instead of silently picking a winner, JustChords shows a version picker in the Library screen so &#039;&#039;&#039;you choose which version to keep&#039;&#039;&#039;. The version you don&#039;t pick is safely backed up first, so nothing is lost outright.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Old, unresolved conflicts (older than about a month) are cleared automatically to avoid clutter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Shared Folders (band/collaborative folders) use a different, always-online sync path and resolve conflicts automatically per song or setlist based on which was edited most recently — see [[Collaboration]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Troubleshooting ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Changes not appearing on another device?&#039;&#039;&#039; Make sure both devices are signed in to the same iCloud account and connected to the internet.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Missing audio/pad files?&#039;&#039;&#039; They may still be downloading — open the song and wait for the download to finish.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Stuck &amp;quot;waiting for iCloud&amp;quot; message?&#039;&#039;&#039; This usually resolves within a few seconds; if it persists, check your device&#039;s iCloud storage isn&#039;t full.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== See also ===&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=446</id>
		<title>Pad Player</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=446"/>
		<updated>2026-09-18T06:05:25Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Tonic Pad =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad is a quick button that plays an ambient drone matched to the key of the song you&#039;re viewing. There&#039;s no separate pad library screen — everything, from turning the pad on to picking a sound and shaping it, happens directly on the quick button itself.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; — tap to start the pad; it plays retuned to the current song&#039;s key.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;On&#039;&#039;&#039; — the pad is currently playing; tap again to stop it.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disabled&#039;&#039;&#039; — no pad sound is available for this song (this shouldn&#039;t normally happen, since a built-in pad is always available as the default).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While a setlist is running, the pad automatically crossfades to match each new song&#039;s key, and keeps playing uninterrupted across songs that share the same key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the quick button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; and go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Quick Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add &#039;&#039;&#039;Tonic Pad&#039;&#039;&#039; to your quick button bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad can also be triggered remotely, for example from a Bluetooth pedal or MIDI controller. It isn&#039;t available when running JustChords as an Audio Unit (AUv3) plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Picking a sound and shaping it ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tap and hold&#039;&#039;&#039; the Tonic Pad quick button. Instead of opening a separate screen, the button expands in place into a small panel:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Sound picker&lt;br /&gt;
: At the top, a menu lists the available pad sounds — the built-in &#039;&#039;&#039;JC Warm Pad&#039;&#039;&#039; (the default) and &#039;&#039;&#039;JC Organ Pad&#039;&#039;&#039;, plus any sounds you&#039;ve imported yourself. Picking one sets the pad sound &#039;&#039;&#039;for this song specifically&#039;&#039;&#039;, overriding the default. If a pad is already playing, it crossfades into the newly picked sound right away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live sound controls&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Volume&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Crossfade&#039;&#039;&#039; (fade length between songs/loops), &#039;&#039;&#039;Low Pass&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;High Pass&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Pan&#039;&#039;&#039;. These apply instantly — even while the pad is playing — and are saved as your general Tonic Pad settings, used for every song rather than per song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tap anywhere outside the panel, or tap the button again, to collapse it back to the normal quick button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing your own pad sounds ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Built-in pads cover the basics, but you can bring your own recordings (for example a commercial pack like Churchfront Pads, or your own ambient drones):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap and hold the Tonic Pad quick button, then choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039; from the sound picker menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose an audio file from Files (mp3 and most other common audio formats are supported).&lt;br /&gt;
# JustChords tries to detect the &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;key&#039;&#039;&#039; from the filename automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and adjust the name or key if needed, then tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the same &#039;&#039;&#039;Manage&#039;&#039;&#039; screen you can also rename or delete pads you&#039;ve imported (swipe or use the context menu). Built-in pads can&#039;t be edited or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How pitch matching works ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* By default, Tonic Pad uses the built-in &#039;&#039;&#039;JC Warm Pad&#039;&#039;&#039; and retunes it in real time to match the song&#039;s key — including any transposition or capo you&#039;ve applied — up to a tritone (6 semitones) in either direction.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you&#039;d rather use a specific pad for a song regardless of key, pick it from the sound picker as described above; JustChords will retune that pad the same way.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because of this real-time retuning, a single pad recording can back a song in any key. Importing recordings closer to a song&#039;s actual key still gives the cleanest sound, since less pitch-shifting means less audible artifacting — but it&#039;s not required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Looking ahead ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad is intentionally kept simple today — one drone per song. It&#039;s built on top of a general-purpose pad architecture designed to grow beyond that, for example playing pads that follow a song&#039;s chord progression rather than just its tonic.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongViewer&amp;diff=445</id>
		<title>SongViewer</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongViewer&amp;diff=445"/>
		<updated>2026-09-18T06:01:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Viewer =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Viewer in JustChords is designed to keep you focused on playing by showing exactly the information you need: lyrics, chords, diagrams and quick tools, all in a configurable layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What you can see ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Viewer displays your song as a readable performance page with lyrics and chord symbols laid out like a song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Optional extras include:&lt;br /&gt;
* Guitar or ukulele chord charts&lt;br /&gt;
* Guitar tabs and simple melody diagrams (when present in the song)&lt;br /&gt;
* Attached sheet music (PDF or image) for reference&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can tap any song section to select it, scroll to it and, if projection is enabled, project that section to your audience.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Showing and hiding elements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The viewer can be customized per song or globally to match different use cases such as practice, rehearsal or live performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Accessing viewer settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Song Viewer to show or hide elements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Toggleable components&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords&#039;&#039;&#039; – Chord symbols above the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; – Main text of the song.&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Charts&#039;&#039;&#039; – Chord charts for guitar or ukulele.&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; – Tab lines when the song contains guitar tab notation.&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Sheet music&#039;&#039;&#039; – Attached PDFs or images, when available.&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Melody&#039;&#039;&#039; – Simple melody diagram created in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also open &#039;&#039;&#039;Zoom &amp;amp; Color&#039;&#039;&#039; to change the size of lyrics, chords, guitar tabs and chord charts, adjust chord color and enable or disable a monospaced font.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song-specific settings ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most Song Viewer display settings — layout, which elements are shown, chord style, chord beats, zoom levels, lyrics background, metronome subdivision and more — are &#039;&#039;&#039;global&#039;&#039;&#039; by default: change one and it applies to every song. Any individual song can instead override these with its own settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Accessing song-specific settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Open the Song Viewer &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; screen and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Song‑specific&#039;&#039;&#039; at the top. This entry is gray while the song is using the global defaults, and turns colored as soon as at least one setting has been overridden for that song.&lt;br /&gt;
: On the Song‑specific screen, every option follows the global default until you change it; anything you&#039;ve overridden is highlighted so you can see at a glance how the song differs from your normal settings.&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Reset to Defaults&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear all overrides for the song and return to the global settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Per device type&lt;br /&gt;
: Song-specific settings are saved separately for each &#039;&#039;&#039;device type&#039;&#039;&#039; – iPhone, iPad and Mac. An override you set while running JustChords on an iPad does &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; change how that same song looks on an iPhone or a Mac. To make a song look different on another device type, open &#039;&#039;&#039;Song‑specific&#039;&#039;&#039; again on that device type and set the override there too.&lt;br /&gt;
: This makes it possible, for example, to show a simplified, large‑text layout for a song on a phone while keeping full chord diagrams for it on an iPad.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Syncing&lt;br /&gt;
: Song-specific settings are stored together with the song itself, so they sync through iCloud along with the rest of your library. An override saved for &amp;quot;iPad&amp;quot; will therefore show up correctly on every iPad you use JustChords on, and an override saved for &amp;quot;iPhone&amp;quot; on every iPhone — but an iPad override never applies on an iPhone or Mac, and vice versa. Each device type keeps and syncs its own set of overrides for the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scrolling songs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For songs longer than the screen height, the Song Viewer offers several scrolling options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Manual scrolling ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Swipe up or down to move through the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a section to scroll to it and select it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Autoscroll ===&lt;br /&gt;
Autoscroll is visible when enabled in settings (Quick Buttons / Autoscroll), View Mode is set to Scrolling (Layout menu), and the song exceeds screen height.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While autoscrolling, you can swipe to reposition; autoscroll continues from the new position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Autoscroll &#039;&#039;&#039;speed&#039;&#039;&#039; is primarily taken from the song&#039;s Duration attribute, which you can edit in Song Editor. If not set, the default song duration of 1:30 is used (adjustable in settings under Quick Buttons / Autoscroll).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also enable +/- buttons in settings to adjust speed during scrolling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bluetooth pedal ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Use a compatible foot pedal that sends Page Up/Down or Arrow Up/Down to jump between sections.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tested pedals include AirTurn PEDPro and M‑VAVE Cube Turner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tapping sections or using a pedal also controls which part of the song is projected when lyrics projection is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick tools, transpose and capo ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Action buttons in the bottom‑right corner give quick access to tools like transpose and capo while you play.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to adjust key and capo&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;More…&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and select a new key.&lt;br /&gt;
: Optionally choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; and set the fret position.&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords combines both settings to display the correct chord shapes for guitar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use &#039;&#039;&#039;Discard transpose/capo&#039;&#039;&#039; in the same menu to revert to the original chords, and keep transpose/capo as temporary performance settings while using &amp;quot;Rewrite into key&amp;quot; in the Song Editor for permanent changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sticky notes and other tools ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can quickly add sticky notes on the song to write musical instructions, cues or reminders and then move, resize, edit or delete them as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Viewer also works together with other tools such as the metronome, audio player and lyrics projection, so your setlists, timing and display stay in sync while you perform.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=436</id>
		<title>Pad Player</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=436"/>
		<updated>2026-09-05T09:09:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Pad Library =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pad Library is where you store the ambient audio pads used by JustChords. It&#039;s a general-purpose collection of looping audio tracks tagged by musical key — currently used to drive the Tonic Pad, but built to support other pad-based playback modes in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords doesn&#039;t ship with any built-in pads. You bring your own recordings (for example a commercial pack like Churchfront Pads, or your own ambient drones) and import them into the library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing pad tracks ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Library sidebar and select &#039;&#039;&#039;Pad Library&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose an audio file from Files (mp3 and most other common audio formats are supported).&lt;br /&gt;
# JustChords tries to detect the &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;key&#039;&#039;&#039; from the filename automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and adjust the name or key if needed, then tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Save&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Managing your pads ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Search the library by name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a pad to edit its name or key.&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete a pad to remove it from the library and delete its audio file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tonic Pad =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad is a quick button that plays an ambient drone matched to the key of the song you&#039;re viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ready&#039;&#039;&#039; — you have at least one pad in your library (or one chosen for this song). Tapping will play it, retuned if needed to match the song&#039;s key.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Active&#039;&#039;&#039; — the pad is currently playing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inactive&#039;&#039;&#039; — your pad library is empty.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tap the button to start or stop the pad. While a setlist is running, the pad automatically crossfades to match each new song&#039;s key, and keeps playing uninterrupted across songs that share the same key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the quick button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; and go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Quick Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add &#039;&#039;&#039;Tonic Pad&#039;&#039;&#039; to your quick button bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad can also be triggered remotely, for example from a Bluetooth pedal or MIDI controller. It isn&#039;t available when running JustChords as an Audio Unit (AUv3) plug-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Choosing a pad for a song =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, JustChords picks the closest-matching pad in your library and retunes it to the song&#039;s key — including any transposition or capo you&#039;ve applied. If you&#039;d rather use a specific pad regardless of key, you can set it per song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &#039;&#039;&#039;Tonic Pad&#039;&#039;&#039;, pick a pad from your library, or leave it on &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to auto-match by key. (This section only appears once you&#039;ve imported at least one pad.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also long-press the Tonic Pad quick button to jump straight to this same picker for the current song, without opening the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How pad matching works =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pads are matched to a song by &#039;&#039;&#039;key&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s key after transposition.&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords doesn&#039;t require an exact match: it picks whichever pad in your library needs the smallest pitch shift to reach the song&#039;s key, then retunes it in real time (up to a tritone, i.e. up to 6 semitones in either direction).&lt;br /&gt;
* Because of this, a single imported pad can back a song in any key. Importing one recording per key still gives the cleanest sound, since less pitch-shifting means less audible artifacting — but it&#039;s no longer required.&lt;br /&gt;
* If your pad library is empty, Tonic Pad shows as inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Looking ahead =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pad Library is intentionally kept independent of the Tonic Pad button. It&#039;s designed to grow beyond a single static drone per song — for example, playing pads that follow a song&#039;s chord progression rather than just its tonic.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=435</id>
		<title>Pad Player</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Pad_Player&amp;diff=435"/>
		<updated>2026-09-04T07:44:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Created page with &amp;quot;= Pad Library =  The Pad Library is where you store the ambient audio pads used by JustChords. It&amp;#039;s a general-purpose collection of looping audio tracks tagged by musical key — currently used to drive the Tonic Pad, but built to support other pad-based playback modes in the future.  JustChords doesn&amp;#039;t ship with any built-in pads. You bring your own recordings (for example a commercial pack like Churchfront Pads, or your own ambient drones) and import them into the libr...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Pad Library =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pad Library is where you store the ambient audio pads used by JustChords. It&#039;s a general-purpose collection of looping audio tracks tagged by musical key — currently used to drive the Tonic Pad, but built to support other pad-based playback modes in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords doesn&#039;t ship with any built-in pads. You bring your own recordings (for example a commercial pack like Churchfront Pads, or your own ambient drones) and import them into the library.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Importing pad tracks ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Library sidebar and select &#039;&#039;&#039;Pad Library&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose one or more audio files (mp3) from Files.&lt;br /&gt;
# JustChords tries to detect the &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;key&#039;&#039;&#039; from each filename automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
# Review and adjust the name or key if needed, then tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Done&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Managing your pads ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Search the library by name.&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a pad to edit its name or key.&lt;br /&gt;
* Duplicate a pad to create a variation.&lt;br /&gt;
* Delete a pad to remove it from the library and delete its audio file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tonic Pad =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad is a quick button that plays an ambient drone matched to the key of the song you&#039;re viewing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Ready&#039;&#039;&#039; — a pad matching the song&#039;s key exists in your library.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Active&#039;&#039;&#039; — the pad is currently playing.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Inactive&#039;&#039;&#039; — no pad in your library matches the song&#039;s key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tap the button to start or stop the pad. While a setlist is running, the pad automatically crossfades to match each new song&#039;s key, and keeps playing uninterrupted across songs that share the same key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling the quick button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; and go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Quick Buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Add &#039;&#039;&#039;Tonic Pad&#039;&#039;&#039; to your quick button bar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tonic Pad can also be triggered remotely, for example from a Bluetooth pedal or MIDI controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Choosing a pad for a song =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, JustChords picks the pad whose key matches the song — including any transposition or capo you&#039;ve applied. If you&#039;d rather use a specific pad regardless of key, you can set it per song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Details&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Under &#039;&#039;&#039;Tonic Pad&#039;&#039;&#039;, pick a pad from your library, or leave it on &#039;&#039;&#039;Default&#039;&#039;&#039; to auto-match by key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= How pad matching works =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pads are matched to a song by &#039;&#039;&#039;key&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s key after transposition.&lt;br /&gt;
* Matching is a straight lookup — JustChords does not pitch-shift audio, so getting key-matched pads across your whole setlist means importing one recording per key.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no pad matches a song&#039;s key and no pad is manually chosen, Tonic Pad shows as inactive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Looking ahead =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pad Library is intentionally kept independent of the Tonic Pad button. It&#039;s designed to grow beyond a single static drone per song — for example, playing pads that follow a song&#039;s chord progression rather than just its tonic.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=MIDI&amp;diff=434</id>
		<title>MIDI</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=MIDI&amp;diff=434"/>
		<updated>2026-08-31T14:47:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= MIDI functionality =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords offers comprehensive MIDI support that allows you to send MIDI messages when songs load, sections change, or other events occur. This powerful feature lets you automate and control external MIDI devices such as synthesizers, drum machines, guitar processors, lighting systems and more directly from your setlist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling MIDI ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIDI is disabled by default. To enable it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the main menu (tap the menu icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once enabled, JustChords will start listening for connected MIDI devices and Bluetooth MIDI controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI connections ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Wired and network MIDI devices ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When MIDI is enabled, JustChords automatically detects all connected MIDI sources and destinations — including USB MIDI interfaces, network MIDI sessions, and virtual ports from other apps. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Main Menu → MIDI → Connected MIDI Devices&#039;&#039;&#039; to see what is detected and configure each device as:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Source + Destination&#039;&#039;&#039; — both send and receive MIDI.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Source&#039;&#039;&#039; — only receive MIDI from this device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Destination&#039;&#039;&#039; — only send MIDI to this device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Disconnect&#039;&#039;&#039; — ignore this device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bluetooth MIDI ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To pair a Bluetooth MIDI controller or device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Main Menu → MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Add Bluetooth MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select your device from the list of available devices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also advertise your iOS device as a Bluetooth MIDI peripheral so other apps or devices can connect to it: toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Advertise this device as BLE MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039; in the same section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Virtual MIDI ports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can create virtual MIDI ports so other apps on the same device can exchange MIDI messages with it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Main Menu → MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Enable Virtual MIDI In &amp;amp; Out&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This creates two system-wide ports — &#039;&#039;&#039;JustChords Out&#039;&#039;&#039; (for other apps to receive from JustChords) and &#039;&#039;&#039;JustChords In&#039;&#039;&#039; (for other apps to send to JustChords).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI Library ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The MIDI Library is a collection of reusable, named MIDI action presets. Each preset contains one or more MIDI messages that can be assigned to songs or triggered by events.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To manage the MIDI Library, go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Library → MIDI Library&#039;&#039;&#039; (accessible from the Library sidebar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the MIDI Library you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add&#039;&#039;&#039; new presets manually or by capturing messages live from a connected device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039; existing presets.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Duplicate&#039;&#039;&#039; presets.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Test&#039;&#039;&#039; a preset by tapping Send to immediately transmit its messages.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete&#039;&#039;&#039; presets you no longer need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each MIDI message in a preset can have an optional &#039;&#039;&#039;Send Delay&#039;&#039;&#039; (in milliseconds) to stagger the timing of messages in sequence.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Supported MIDI message types include: Note On, Note Off, Control Change, Program Change, Pitch Bend, Aftertouch, Channel Pressure, SysEx, and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI in songs ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIDI Library presets can be attached to individual songs with specific triggers controlling when they fire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song MIDI triggers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each MIDI action in a song&#039;s structure can fire on one of four triggers:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Appear&#039;&#039;&#039; — fired automatically when the song loads into the viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section Select&#039;&#039;&#039; — fired when that section becomes the active section (with an optional delay in beats).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section Deselect&#039;&#039;&#039; — fired when navigating away from that section (useful for sending &amp;quot;note off&amp;quot; or cleanup messages).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Button&#039;&#039;&#039; — displayed as a tappable orange button directly in the song viewer, so you can fire the action manually at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Assigning MIDI actions to a song ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Structure &amp;amp; MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039; (the song arrangement editor).&lt;br /&gt;
# Add a MIDI structure item and select a preset from the MIDI Library.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose the trigger type and optional beat delay.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIDI actions assigned to &#039;&#039;Song Appear&#039;&#039; are shown as small labels at the top of the song content in the viewer. &#039;&#039;MIDI Button&#039;&#039; actions are shown as prominent orange buttons inline in the song content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI controller mappings ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can map incoming MIDI messages from foot pedals or controllers to JustChords actions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To configure mappings, go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Settings → MIDI → MIDI Controller&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Available actions that can be triggered by MIDI input:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Category !! Action&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Setlist navigation || Next Song, Previous Song, Jump to Song (by index or MIDI Custom ID)&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Section navigation || Next Section, Previous Section, First Section, Last Section, Jump to Section&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Scrolling || Scroll Down, Scroll Up&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Autoscroll || Start/Pause, Toggle, Speed Up, Speed Down&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Transpose || Transpose Up, Transpose Down&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Zoom || Zoom In, Zoom Out&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Audio track || Toggle playback&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Projection || Blackout toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Metronome || Toggle&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Chord Beats Sync || Loop toggle (AUv3)&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For &#039;&#039;Jump to Song&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Jump to Section&#039;&#039;, the MIDI Data 2 byte value selects the target song index or section index respectively. For &#039;&#039;Jump to Song by MIDI ID&#039;&#039;, Data 2 matches a custom MIDI ID you set in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure Data 2 as a fixed value, as an On/Off switch (0 = off, 1–127 = on), or as a wildcard that passes the received value directly to the action.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI Clock ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sending MIDI Clock ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can send MIDI Clock to synchronize external devices to a song&#039;s tempo. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Settings → MIDI → MIDI Tempo&#039;&#039;&#039; and enable &#039;&#039;&#039;Send on song appear&#039;&#039;&#039; under the MIDI Clock section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can configure how many seconds the clock runs after the song appears (1–30 seconds).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Receiving MIDI Clock ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can receive MIDI Clock from an external source (such as a DAW or drum machine) to drive &#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039; — the feature that highlights chords in sync with playback. Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Settings → Control → Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; and set the &#039;&#039;Beats Source&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039;, then select your clock source device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords handles Start, Stop, Continue, and Song Position Pointer (SPP) messages automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI Tempo message ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a song appears, JustChords can send a custom MIDI message carrying the song&#039;s BPM value, so external devices can follow the song&#039;s tempo automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Settings → MIDI → MIDI Tempo&#039;&#039;&#039; and enable &#039;&#039;&#039;Send on song appear&#039;&#039;&#039; under the MIDI Message section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Options:&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Status&#039;&#039;&#039; — choose the message type (e.g. Control Change).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Channel&#039;&#039;&#039; — MIDI channel 1–16.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Data 1&#039;&#039;&#039; — the controller number or parameter.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Data 2&#039;&#039;&#039; — automatically set to the song&#039;s BPM (with optional offset and divider).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM Offset&#039;&#039;&#039; — subtract a fixed value from the BPM before sending.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM Divider&#039;&#039;&#039; — divide the BPM (e.g. divide by 2 for half-tempo).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Chord Beats Sync and MIDI output ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Chord Beats Sync feature highlights chords in the song viewer in time with the beat. It can also output the current chord as MIDI data so external instruments follow along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Settings → Control → Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; to configure:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats Source&#039;&#039;&#039; — Off, Metronome, or MIDI Clock.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Out → Song MIDI&#039;&#039;&#039; — controls when section-change MIDI messages are sent: Always, Only when transport is running, or Only when transport is not running.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Out → Chords&#039;&#039;&#039; — sends the current chord as MIDI data. Options: Off, Chords (Note On/Off), or Tone Packet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Anticipation&#039;&#039;&#039; — send chord MIDI slightly early (1/4, 1/8, or 1/16 beat) to compensate for device latency.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Send first chord on song display / section select&#039;&#039;&#039; — immediately outputs the first chord when a song loads or a section is navigated to.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Loop Song&#039;&#039;&#039; — loops the song&#039;s chord timeline continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI use cases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MIDI integration in JustChords enables many creative and professional workflows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Automated patch changes&#039;&#039;&#039; – Switch sounds on synthesizers and guitar processors when a song loads.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Drum machine control&#039;&#039;&#039; – Start backing tracks or change patterns automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Lighting control&#039;&#039;&#039; – Trigger lighting cues synchronized with your setlist.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Multi-device synchronization&#039;&#039;&#039; – Control bass players, synths, and other MIDI-enabled gear from one central setlist.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Foot controller input&#039;&#039;&#039; – Use MIDI foot pedals to navigate songs, transpose or trigger projection sections.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tempo sync&#039;&#039;&#039; – Broadcast the song&#039;s BPM as a MIDI Clock or custom MIDI message so every device stays in time.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord output&#039;&#039;&#039; – Feed chord data in real time to synthesizers or backing-track apps via MIDI Note On/Off or Tone Packet Protocol.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For a real-world example, see how Greg from Seattle uses MIDI messages to control his entire band setup from JustChords: [https://www.justchords.app/stories-crossroad/ Greg&#039;s MIDI story]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=433</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=433"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:14:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* ABC Notation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Read more about [[ABC Notation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebEditor.jpg|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=432</id>
		<title>ABC Notation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=432"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:12:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Attaching a score to a song */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ABC notation is a text-based format for writing sheet music. Instead of a graphical staff editor, you type plain text — notes, rhythm, key, and structure — and the result renders as a standard musical score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords supports ABC notation as a first-class feature: attach an ABC score to any song, and it displays as sheet music alongside your chords and lyrics. A dedicated built-in editor lets you write and preview the score in real time, directly on your device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What ABC notation looks like ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimal score is just a few header lines followed by the notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
T:Simple Scale&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
C D E F | G A B c |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;X:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tune number — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;T:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; title — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;M:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; meter — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; default note length — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;K:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; key&lt;br /&gt;
* Letters A–G are notes; lowercase letters are an octave higher&lt;br /&gt;
* Bar lines separate measures; notes are read left to right&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these simple rules you can express melodies, chords, lyrics, repeats, and multi-voice arrangements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC notation in JustChords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching a score to a song ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open any song in the [[SongEditor]]. There are two ways to add an ABC score:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;ABC Notation&#039;&#039;&#039; — JustChords inserts a ready-to-edit block for you.&lt;br /&gt;
* Or paste your ABC source directly inside an existing &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{start_of_abc}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords renders the score as sheet music instantly. It is stored with the song and displayed in the Song Viewer below the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The built-in ABC editor ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords includes a dedicated ABC editor with a live preview: edit the text on one side, see the rendered score on the other. No external tools needed — you can draft and refine sheet music entirely within the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is also available as a standalone web tool:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[https://abceditor.justchords.app JustChords ABC Notation Editor]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar tablature ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can automatically generate guitar tablature from any ABC score. Enable it in the song&#039;s notation settings and the tab appears beneath the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transposition ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ABC score transposes together with the rest of the song when you change the key or set a capo in the Song Viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rendering engine ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords renders ABC notation using the &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://www.abcjs.net/ abcjs]&#039;&#039;&#039; library. Anything supported by abcjs works in JustChords. When drafting scores in an external editor, choosing an abcjs-based tool will most closely match what you see in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ready-to-use snippets covering note lengths, rests, sharps, chord symbols, lyrics, repeats, and more:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
→ [[ABC Notation Examples]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://abcnotation.com/ abcnotation.com] — the reference home of the ABC standard, with the full format specification&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://editor.drawthedots.com/ abcjs Editor (drawthedots.com)] — official abcjs live editor; closest match to JustChords rendering&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.abcjs.net/abcjs-editor.html abcjs.net Editor] — another abcjs-powered editor&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://michaeleskin.com/abctools/abctools.html ABC Transcription Tools] — full-featured editor with playback and export&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=431</id>
		<title>ABC Notation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=431"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:08:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ABC notation is a text-based format for writing sheet music. Instead of a graphical staff editor, you type plain text — notes, rhythm, key, and structure — and the result renders as a standard musical score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords supports ABC notation as a first-class feature: attach an ABC score to any song, and it displays as sheet music alongside your chords and lyrics. A dedicated built-in editor lets you write and preview the score in real time, directly on your device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What ABC notation looks like ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimal score is just a few header lines followed by the notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
T:Simple Scale&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
C D E F | G A B c |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;X:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tune number — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;T:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; title — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;M:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; meter — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; default note length — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;K:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; key&lt;br /&gt;
* Letters A–G are notes; lowercase letters are an octave higher&lt;br /&gt;
* Bar lines separate measures; notes are read left to right&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these simple rules you can express melodies, chords, lyrics, repeats, and multi-voice arrangements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC notation in JustChords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching a score to a song ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open any song in the editor and switch to the &#039;&#039;&#039;ABC&#039;&#039;&#039; tab. Paste or type your ABC source there and JustChords renders it as sheet music instantly. The score is stored with the song and displayed in the Song Viewer below the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The built-in ABC editor ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords includes a dedicated ABC editor with a live preview: edit the text on one side, see the rendered score on the other. No external tools needed — you can draft and refine sheet music entirely within the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is also available as a standalone web tool:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[https://abceditor.justchords.app JustChords ABC Notation Editor]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar tablature ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can automatically generate guitar tablature from any ABC score. Enable it in the song&#039;s notation settings and the tab appears beneath the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transposition ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ABC score transposes together with the rest of the song when you change the key or set a capo in the Song Viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rendering engine ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords renders ABC notation using the &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://www.abcjs.net/ abcjs]&#039;&#039;&#039; library. Anything supported by abcjs works in JustChords. When drafting scores in an external editor, choosing an abcjs-based tool will most closely match what you see in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ready-to-use snippets covering note lengths, rests, sharps, chord symbols, lyrics, repeats, and more:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
→ [[ABC Notation Examples]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://abcnotation.com/ abcnotation.com] — the reference home of the ABC standard, with the full format specification&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://editor.drawthedots.com/ abcjs Editor (drawthedots.com)] — official abcjs live editor; closest match to JustChords rendering&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.abcjs.net/abcjs-editor.html abcjs.net Editor] — another abcjs-powered editor&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://michaeleskin.com/abctools/abctools.html ABC Transcription Tools] — full-featured editor with playback and export&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=430</id>
		<title>ABC Notation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation&amp;diff=430"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:08:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Created page with &amp;quot;ABC notation is a text-based format for writing sheet music. Instead of a graphical staff editor, you type plain text — notes, rhythm, key, and structure — and the result renders as a standard musical score.  JustChords supports ABC notation as a first-class feature: attach an ABC score to any song, and it displays as sheet music alongside your chords and lyrics. A dedicated built-in editor lets you write and preview the score in real time, directly on your device....&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;ABC notation is a text-based format for writing sheet music. Instead of a graphical staff editor, you type plain text — notes, rhythm, key, and structure — and the result renders as a standard musical score.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords supports ABC notation as a first-class feature: attach an ABC score to any song, and it displays as sheet music alongside your chords and lyrics. A dedicated built-in editor lets you write and preview the score in real time, directly on your device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What ABC notation looks like ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A minimal score is just a few header lines followed by the notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
T:Simple Scale&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
C D E F | G A B c |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;X:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; tune number — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;T:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; title — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;M:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; meter — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; default note length — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;K:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; key&lt;br /&gt;
* Letters A–G are notes; lowercase letters are an octave higher&lt;br /&gt;
* Bar lines separate measures; notes are read left to right&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these simple rules you can express melodies, chords, lyrics, repeats, and multi-voice arrangements.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC notation in JustChords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Attaching a score to a song ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open any song in the editor and switch to the &#039;&#039;&#039;ABC&#039;&#039;&#039; tab. Paste or type your ABC source there and JustChords renders it as sheet music instantly. The score is stored with the song and displayed in the Song Viewer below the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== The built-in ABC editor ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords includes a dedicated ABC editor with a live preview: edit the text on one side, see the rendered score on the other. No external tools needed — you can draft and refine sheet music entirely within the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor is also available as a standalone web tool:&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;[https://www.justchords.app/abceditor/ JustChords ABC Editor]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar tablature ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can automatically generate guitar tablature from any ABC score. Enable it in the song&#039;s notation settings and the tab appears beneath the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transposition ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The ABC score transposes together with the rest of the song when you change the key or set a capo in the Song Viewer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rendering engine ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords renders ABC notation using the &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://www.abcjs.net/ abcjs]&#039;&#039;&#039; library. Anything supported by abcjs works in JustChords. When drafting scores in an external editor, choosing an abcjs-based tool will most closely match what you see in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Examples ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ready-to-use snippets covering note lengths, rests, sharps, chord symbols, lyrics, repeats, and more:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
→ [[ABC Notation Examples]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== External resources ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://abcnotation.com/ abcnotation.com] — the reference home of the ABC standard, with the full format specification&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://editor.drawthedots.com/ abcjs Editor (drawthedots.com)] — official abcjs live editor; closest match to JustChords rendering&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.abcjs.net/abcjs-editor.html abcjs.net Editor] — another abcjs-powered editor&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://michaeleskin.com/abctools/abctools.html ABC Transcription Tools] — full-featured editor with playback and export&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation_Examples&amp;diff=429</id>
		<title>ABC Notation Examples</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=ABC_Notation_Examples&amp;diff=429"/>
		<updated>2026-08-14T14:05:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= ABC Notation =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This page collects ready-to-use ABC notation snippets. Copy any example into a song&#039;s ABC field in JustChords and it will render as a musical score. For an overview of what ABC notation is, see [[ABC Notation]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A minimal melody ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The smallest useful score: a few notes with a title, meter, and default note length.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
T:Simple Scale&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
C D E F | G A B c |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X:&#039;&#039;&#039; tune number — &#039;&#039;&#039;T:&#039;&#039;&#039; title — &#039;&#039;&#039;M:&#039;&#039;&#039; meter — &#039;&#039;&#039;L:&#039;&#039;&#039; default note length — &#039;&#039;&#039;K:&#039;&#039;&#039; key.&lt;br /&gt;
* Letters A–G are notes; lowercase letters are one octave higher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Note lengths and rests ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numbers lengthen a note, a slash shortens it, and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;z&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:G&lt;br /&gt;
G2 A2 | B4 | c/2 c/2 d/2 d/2 e2 | z2 d2 |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = half note, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;B4&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = whole note, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;c/2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = eighth note, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;z2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; = half rest.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note lengths and rests are &#039;&#039;&#039;relative to the default note length&#039;&#039;&#039; set with &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, so the same number means a different duration depending on &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* With &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:1/4&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;z2&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a half-note rest (1/4 × 2).&lt;br /&gt;
* With &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;L:1/8&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;z4&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a half-note rest (1/8 × 4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sharps, flats, and octaves ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:D&lt;br /&gt;
^F _B =C C, | c&#039; d&#039; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;^&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; sharp, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;_&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; flat, &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;=&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; natural.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Octaves:&#039;&#039;&#039; uppercase &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is Middle C. A comma after a note lowers it one octave (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C,&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the octave below Middle C), and a lowercase letter is one octave above (&amp;lt;code&amp;gt;c&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is the octave above Middle C). So &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;C, C c&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; covers three octaves.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Chord symbols above the staff ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord names in quotes appear above the notes, so the score doubles as a lead sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;C&amp;quot;C E G c | &amp;quot;G&amp;quot;B, D G B | &amp;quot;Am&amp;quot;A, C E A | &amp;quot;F&amp;quot;F, A c F |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Chords (stacked notes) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chords — what classical Western notation shows as multiple note heads on a single stem — are written by enclosing the notes in square brackets &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[ ]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;, with no spaces inside the brackets. Length and pitch modifiers can be included as needed, and by convention the notes are listed in ascending order, for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[Acea]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chords can be arranged into beamed groups using spaces, exactly like individual notes:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
T:Chords&lt;br /&gt;
M:2/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
[CEGc] [C2G2] [CE][DF] | [D2F2][EG][FA] [A4d4]|]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note the difference from the section above: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;quot;C&amp;quot;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a chord &#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039; printed above the staff, while &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[CEG]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a chord &#039;&#039;played&#039;&#039; as stacked notes on the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lyrics under the melody ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line aligns syllables to the notes above it. Use a hyphen to split a word across notes and a space to move to the next note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:C&lt;br /&gt;
C C G G | A A G2 |&lt;br /&gt;
w: Twin-kle twin-kle lit-tle star&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Multiple verses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Stack several &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines to add more verses; each renders on its own row beneath the staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:3/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/8&lt;br /&gt;
K:A&lt;br /&gt;
z2 &amp;quot;A&amp;quot;E E | F E3 | z2 &amp;quot;F#m&amp;quot;F E | F A3 |&lt;br /&gt;
w: 1.~Al-most Hea-ven. West Vir-gin-ia.&lt;br /&gt;
w: 2.~All my mem&#039;-ries gath-er round her.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;~&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; keeps a syllable and the following word joined under one note.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Repeats and bar lines ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
X:1&lt;br /&gt;
M:4/4&lt;br /&gt;
L:1/4&lt;br /&gt;
K:G&lt;br /&gt;
|: G A B c | d c B A :| G4 |]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;:|&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; mark a repeated section; &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;|]&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; is a final bar line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords can generate guitar tablature automatically from any of these examples — enable it in the song&#039;s notation settings.&lt;br /&gt;
* Keep each staff line short so the score stays readable on smaller screens.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can freely mix chord symbols, lyrics, and multiple verses in the same tune.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Online ABC editors ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These free web editors let you type ABC notation and see the score update live — handy for drafting and checking a tune before pasting it into JustChords. Because JustChords renders with the abcjs engine, the abcjs-based editors will most closely match how your score looks in the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://editor.drawthedots.com/ abcjs Editor (drawthedots.com)] — the official abcjs live editor; the closest match to JustChords&#039; rendering.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://www.abcjs.net/abcjs-editor.html abcjs.net Editor] — another abcjs-powered editor with side-by-side text and score.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://michaeleskin.com/abctools/abctools.html ABC Transcription Tools] — full-featured editor with playback, transpose, and export options.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://abc.rectanglered.com/ ABC Sandbox (rectanglered)] — a lightweight, no-frills live editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://abcnotation.com/ abcnotation.com] — the reference home of the ABC standard, with the full format specification and a large searchable tune library.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Song_Import&amp;diff=428</id>
		<title>Song Import</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Song_Import&amp;diff=428"/>
		<updated>2026-08-03T10:12:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Song import ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords provides several ways to import new songs into your Library so you can choose the method that best fits your workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import from online search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fastest way to add songs is via the built-in online search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 1. Online Song Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How it works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding the songs you like is easy.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add song&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Search online&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search Textbox to type the song title (and optionally artist).&lt;br /&gt;
# Type &#039;&#039;&#039;Let It Be&#039;&#039;&#039; or any song title you like. (JustChords queries its known online chord resources and shows a list of matching songs.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click on the search result to see a preview of the chord sheet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the desired entry from the results and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to add the song to your Library.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to store the chord sheet in your songs library&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;✓&#039;&#039;&#039; to close the dialog&lt;br /&gt;
You have successfully imported the chord sheet. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2. External song pages (e.g. SongSelect) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For external sites such as CCLI SongSelect you can configure JustChords to open them directly in an in‑app browser (WebView).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Setup&lt;br /&gt;
: Add the external domain (for example the SongSelect URL) to JustChords once.&lt;br /&gt;
: This creates an entry that you can reuse later to open that site inside the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Usage&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose the external source entry in the online search section.&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords opens the site in an in‑app WebView, where you can log in and navigate to the desired song.&lt;br /&gt;
: On the external site, download the ChordPro file for the song (note: services such as SongSelect may require a valid license for specific downloads).&lt;br /&gt;
: When the ChordPro file is opened, JustChords shows an &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the top‑right corner of the WebView.&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to pull the song content into your Library as a normal, editable song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flow lets you stay inside JustChords while using licensed external catalogues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manual entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer full control, you can create a song completely by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to create&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Add song&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Manual entry&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Enter title, metadata, lyrics and chords directly in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for original songs, arrangements that do not exist online, or when you want to follow your own formatting conventions from the start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create song from clipboard ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a song text (ideally in ChordPro format) copied to your device&#039;s clipboard, you can turn it into a song in one step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to use&lt;br /&gt;
: Copy the song text to the clipboard (for example from a website, email or notes app).&lt;br /&gt;
: In JustChords, choose the option to create or import a song from clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords creates a new song and opens it in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the clipboard content is valid ChordPro, the newly created song is immediately transposeable and ready for use in projection and setlists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import from file (including bulk import) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also import songs from files stored locally or in cloud storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Supported formats&lt;br /&gt;
: ChordPro files&lt;br /&gt;
: PDF files&lt;br /&gt;
: Image files (JPG, PNG, HEIC)&lt;br /&gt;
: SongbookPro files&lt;br /&gt;
: OnSong files&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords song files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to import&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Import from file&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Select one or more files in the supported formats.&lt;br /&gt;
: Confirm to start the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple files can be selected at once, so bulk import of entire song collections is possible in a single operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro files with multiple songs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a ChordPro file contains multiple songs, make sure of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Before each new song, insert the directive:&lt;br /&gt;
  `{new_song}`&lt;br /&gt;
* Each song must have a unique title defined with:&lt;br /&gt;
  `{title: Song title}`&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows JustChords to correctly detect and split multiple songs within a single ChordPro file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PDF files ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you import a PDF file, JustChords creates a new song with the PDF attached to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The PDF becomes part of the song and can be opened directly from within JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
* This is useful for scanned lead sheets or scores that are not available in text or ChordPro format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image files (chord sheet photo or screenshot) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can read a chord sheet directly from a photo or screenshot using on‑device text recognition (OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How it works&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords scans the image for text and automatically identifies chord names based on their position and content.&lt;br /&gt;
: Chords are mapped to the lyrics below them and the result is converted to ChordPro format, ready for transposing and projection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Requirements for best results&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords must appear on a separate line directly above the corresponding lyrics.&#039;&#039;&#039; This is the standard layout used by most chord sheet websites and apps.&lt;br /&gt;
: The image should be reasonably sharp and the text clearly readable.&lt;br /&gt;
: Supported file formats: &#039;&#039;&#039;JPG, PNG, HEIC&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; What to expect&lt;br /&gt;
: The imported song opens in the Song Editor so you can review and correct the result before saving.&lt;br /&gt;
: OCR is not perfect — unusual fonts, low contrast, or handwritten sheets may produce errors that require manual editing.&lt;br /&gt;
: The feature works fully on‑device with no internet connection required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing and responsibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all import methods (online search, external pages, ChordPro, PDF and other formats), please note:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords does not distribute, sell or license any copyrighted content.&lt;br /&gt;
* The user is fully responsible for complying with the terms of use and licensing of any content that is imported, such as song lyrics or chord sheets downloaded from the web.&lt;br /&gt;
* Not everything that can be found online and is advertised as &amp;quot;free download&amp;quot; is in fact free of licensing or copyright restrictions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always check the licensing situation and make sure you have the appropriate rights to use and project any imported material.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Song_Import&amp;diff=427</id>
		<title>Song Import</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Song_Import&amp;diff=427"/>
		<updated>2026-08-03T10:11:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Song import ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords provides several ways to import new songs into your Library so you can choose the method that best fits your workflow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import from online search ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fastest way to add songs is via the built-in online search.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 1. Online Song Search ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How it works&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Adding the songs you like is easy.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Add song&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Search online&#039;&#039;&#039;  [[File:add-song-justchords.png|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
Use the search Textbox to type the song title (and optionally artist).&lt;br /&gt;
# Type &#039;&#039;&#039;Let It Be&#039;&#039;&#039; or any song title you like. (JustChords queries its known online chord resources and shows a list of matching songs.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click on the search result to see a preview of the chord sheet  [[File:search-online-justchords.png|frameless]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the desired entry from the results and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to add the song to your Library.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to store the chord sheet in your songs library&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap/Click &#039;&#039;&#039;✓&#039;&#039;&#039; to close the dialog&lt;br /&gt;
You have successfully imported the chord sheet. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:let-it-be-guitar-justchords.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== 2. External song pages (e.g. SongSelect) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For external sites such as CCLI SongSelect you can configure JustChords to open them directly in an in‑app browser (WebView).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Setup&lt;br /&gt;
: Add the external domain (for example the SongSelect URL) to JustChords once.&lt;br /&gt;
: This creates an entry that you can reuse later to open that site inside the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Usage&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose the external source entry in the online search section.&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords opens the site in an in‑app WebView, where you can log in and navigate to the desired song.&lt;br /&gt;
: On the external site, download the ChordPro file for the song (note: services such as SongSelect may require a valid license for specific downloads).&lt;br /&gt;
: When the ChordPro file is opened, JustChords shows an &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the top‑right corner of the WebView.&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;&#039; to pull the song content into your Library as a normal, editable song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This flow lets you stay inside JustChords while using licensed external catalogues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Manual entry ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you prefer full control, you can create a song completely by hand.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to create&lt;br /&gt;
: Tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Add song&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Manual entry&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Enter title, metadata, lyrics and chords directly in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for original songs, arrangements that do not exist online, or when you want to follow your own formatting conventions from the start.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create song from clipboard ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already have a song text (ideally in ChordPro format) copied to your device&#039;s clipboard, you can turn it into a song in one step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to use&lt;br /&gt;
: Copy the song text to the clipboard (for example from a website, email or notes app).&lt;br /&gt;
: In JustChords, choose the option to create or import a song from clipboard.&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords creates a new song and opens it in the Song Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the clipboard content is valid ChordPro, the newly created song is immediately transposeable and ready for use in projection and setlists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import from file (including bulk import) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also import songs from files stored locally or in cloud storage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Supported formats&lt;br /&gt;
: ChordPro files&lt;br /&gt;
: PDF files&lt;br /&gt;
: Image files (JPG, PNG, HEIC)&lt;br /&gt;
: SongbookPro files&lt;br /&gt;
: OnSong files&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords song files&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How to import&lt;br /&gt;
: Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Import from file&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
: Select one or more files in the supported formats.&lt;br /&gt;
: Confirm to start the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple files can be selected at once, so bulk import of entire song collections is possible in a single operation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro files with multiple songs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a ChordPro file contains multiple songs, make sure of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Before each new song, insert the directive:&lt;br /&gt;
  `{new_song}`&lt;br /&gt;
* Each song must have a unique title defined with:&lt;br /&gt;
  `{title: Song title}`&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This allows JustChords to correctly detect and split multiple songs within a single ChordPro file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== PDF files ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you import a PDF file, JustChords creates a new song with the PDF attached to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The PDF becomes part of the song and can be opened directly from within JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
* This is useful for scanned lead sheets or scores that are not available in text or ChordPro format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image files (chord sheet photo or screenshot) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords can read a chord sheet directly from a photo or screenshot using on‑device text recognition (OCR).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; How it works&lt;br /&gt;
: JustChords scans the image for text and automatically identifies chord names based on their position and content.&lt;br /&gt;
: Chords are mapped to the lyrics below them and the result is converted to ChordPro format, ready for transposing and projection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Requirements for best results&lt;br /&gt;
: &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords must appear on a separate line directly above the corresponding lyrics.&#039;&#039;&#039; This is the standard layout used by most chord sheet websites and apps.&lt;br /&gt;
: The image should be reasonably sharp and the text clearly readable.&lt;br /&gt;
: Supported file formats: &#039;&#039;&#039;JPG, PNG, HEIC&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; What to expect&lt;br /&gt;
: The imported song opens in the Song Editor so you can review and correct the result before saving.&lt;br /&gt;
: OCR is not perfect — unusual fonts, low contrast, or handwritten sheets may produce errors that require manual editing.&lt;br /&gt;
: The feature works fully on‑device with no internet connection required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Licensing and responsibility ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For all import methods (online search, external pages, ChordPro, PDF and other formats), please note:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords does not distribute, sell or license any copyrighted content.&lt;br /&gt;
* The user is fully responsible for complying with the terms of use and licensing of any content that is imported, such as song lyrics or chord sheets downloaded from the web.&lt;br /&gt;
* Not everything that can be found online and is advertised as &amp;quot;free download&amp;quot; is in fact free of licensing or copyright restrictions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Always check the licensing situation and make sure you have the appropriate rights to use and project any imported material.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=420</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=420"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:43:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebEditor.jpg|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=419</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=419"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:42:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebEditor.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=418</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=418"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:41:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:WebEditor.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=417</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=417"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:38:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[:File:webEditor.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:WebEditor.jpg&amp;diff=416</id>
		<title>File:WebEditor.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:WebEditor.jpg&amp;diff=416"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:38:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=415</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=415"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:36:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=414</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=414"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:34:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* How to start the Web Editor */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network: &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Element&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;JustChords&#039;&#039;&#039; logo&lt;br /&gt;
| Animated indicator that the server is active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connection dot&lt;br /&gt;
| Red = disconnected, green = connected to JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark / Light&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggles dark and light mode. Preference is saved in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Opens the syntax reference panel (see [[#Syntax reference panel|below]]).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords&#039;&#039;&#039; — highlighted in your chosen chord colour (set in JustChords preferences).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039; — orange, matching &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{curly brace}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directives.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; — grey, for lines wrapped in parentheses &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;(like this)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section labels&#039;&#039;&#039; — grey, for lines ending in a colon such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Verse:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status bar at the bottom shows the current line and column number and the total character count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Syntax reference panel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039; to open a quick-reference panel on the right side of the screen. It covers chords, chord comments, sections, line comments, directives, text formatting, ABC notation, and more. A link at the bottom of the panel points to the full [[SongEditor]] wiki page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;&#039;&#039;Escape&#039;&#039;&#039; or click &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; to dismiss the panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor supports standard keyboard shortcuts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Action&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Tab&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert four spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Escape&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Close the Help panel (if open).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords running on iPhone or iPad (iOS 16 or later).&lt;br /&gt;
* The browser device must be on the &#039;&#039;&#039;same Wi-Fi network&#039;&#039;&#039; as the iOS device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Any modern browser: Safari, Chrome, Firefox, Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* For the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; address: Safari on macOS/iOS, or Chrome 88+. If the address does not resolve, use the numeric IP shown in the Web Editor settings panel instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Problem&lt;br /&gt;
! Solution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Page does not load&lt;br /&gt;
| Make sure both devices are on the same Wi-Fi network. Try the numeric IP address instead of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; does not resolve&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the numeric IP address. mDNS may be blocked on some enterprise or guest Wi-Fi networks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connection dot stays red&lt;br /&gt;
| Reload the browser page. If the problem persists, toggle the Web Editor off and on in JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Changes in browser are not saved&lt;br /&gt;
| Check that the connection dot is green. If the WebSocket disconnected, edits made while offline are lost — reconnect and re-enter.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Port 8080 is already in use&lt;br /&gt;
| Another app on your device is using port 8080. Quit that app and restart the Web Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related topics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Getting started with JustChords]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=413</id>
		<title>SongEditor</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=SongEditor&amp;diff=413"/>
		<updated>2026-08-01T20:33:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Song Editor is where you create and edit songs. The header holds the song&#039;s details — title, artist, tags, key, measure, tempo, and duration — and the body below is where you write the chords and lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Where to find the Song Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Creating a new song from your library (“+” / “New Song”).&lt;br /&gt;
• Selecting an existing song and choosing “Edit”.&lt;br /&gt;
• Importing a song (text, ChordPro, PDF, or other supported formats) and opening it to refine.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Song Editor Header ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Title and Artist ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Song Title&#039;&#039;&#039; is how the song appears in the Library under “All Songs”. The &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039; groups songs by performer; each artist appears in the Sidebar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Artists&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tags ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Tags&#039;&#039;&#039; to categorize songs (genre, theme, event, etc.). Existing tags are suggested as you type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Original Key ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Original Key&#039;&#039;&#039; should match the key of the chords you entered or imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• To change the written key: &#039;&#039;&#039;Tools&#039;&#039;&#039; → &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite song into key&#039;&#039;&#039;, then pick a target key. Chords and original key are updated.&lt;br /&gt;
• To keep the written key but play in another: use &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; in the Song Overview. This changes only the displayed key, not the stored song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song Measure ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Measure&#039;&#039;&#039; (time signature) the song is in. Used by&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Song Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
=== Writing lyrics and chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song is written as text document and uses simple syntax based on the chordpro [https://www.chordpro.org/] format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example, this is the contents of a simple song:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;world full of &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;chords, where &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;melodies un&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;fold,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;A &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;digital ha&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;ven for &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;stories untold.&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;With a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;tap and a &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;swipe, a &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;music&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;ian&#039;s de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Just&#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;Chords guiding &#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;through the musical &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;night.&#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse 1:&#039;&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;In the &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;palm of your &#039;&#039;&#039;[G]&#039;&#039;&#039;hand,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;a song&#039;&#039;&#039;[D]&#039;&#039;&#039;writer&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;dream,&#039;&#039;‎&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are interspersed with &#039;&#039;&#039;chords&#039;&#039;&#039; written between brackets &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039;. The chords are placed in front of the syllable they belong to.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Sections&#039;&#039;&#039; of the song are separated by an empty line. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. Each section can be labeled with a &#039;&#039;&#039;name&#039;&#039;&#039;. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then following it with a new line. After you have labeled sections, you can define the song structure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; or musical instructions should be written as text on a line surrounded with parentheses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A chord is any text between &#039;&#039;&#039;[&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;]&#039;&#039;&#039; placed directly in front of the syllable it belongs to, e.g. &#039;&#039;&#039;[C]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Dm7]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[G/B]&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;[Gsus4]&#039;&#039;&#039;. JustChords recognises the note name (A–H, so both &#039;&#039;&#039;B&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;H&#039;&#039;&#039; are accepted), sharps and flats (&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039;, or the &#039;&#039;&#039;♯&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;♭&#039;&#039;&#039; symbols), minor / major modifiers (&#039;&#039;&#039;m&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;min&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;-&#039;&#039;&#039;, …), extensions such as &#039;&#039;&#039;7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;maj7&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;sus4&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;add9&#039;&#039;&#039;, and an optional slash bass note such as &#039;&#039;&#039;/B&#039;&#039;&#039;. Recognising the chord this way is what lets JustChords &#039;&#039;&#039;transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; the song and, where enabled, display chord &#039;&#039;&#039;diagrams&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because chords are anchored to the following character, put the bracket exactly where the chord change happens inside a word, e.g. &#039;&#039;de&#039;&#039;&#039;[Em]&#039;&#039;&#039;light&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Chord comments ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes you want to attach a short note to a single chord — a fingering hint, a picking instruction, or a harmonic label — without turning it into a separate line comment. JustChords supports this by writing an &#039;&#039;&#039;asterisk&#039;&#039;&#039; (&#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) inside the chord bracket, right after the chord. Everything after the asterisk is treated as the chord&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039;, and everything before it is still parsed as a normal, transposable chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[C*let ring]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;C&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;let ring&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[Am7*barre]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;Am7&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;barre&#039;&#039;.&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;[G/B*walk-up]&#039;&#039; — the chord is &#039;&#039;&#039;G/B&#039;&#039;&#039;, with the comment &#039;&#039;walk-up&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Key points:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• The chord part (before the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) keeps working normally — it is validated as a chord, transposed with the rest of the song, and can show a chord diagram.&lt;br /&gt;
• The comment part (after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;) is free text and is displayed alongside the chord.&lt;br /&gt;
• This works both in the inline &#039;&#039;[chord]lyric&#039;&#039; style and in the &amp;quot;chords on a separate line above the lyrics&amp;quot; style.&lt;br /&gt;
• If there is nothing after the &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039;, the chord is treated as having an empty comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use chord comments when the note belongs to &#039;&#039;&#039;one specific chord&#039;&#039;&#039;. Use a line comment in parentheses (see below) when the instruction applies to a whole line or section.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sections and section labels ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A blank line starts a new &#039;&#039;&#039;section&#039;&#039;&#039;. To give a section a name, put the label on its own line ending with a colon, for example &#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Chorus:&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Bridge:&#039;&#039;. The label line must not contain brackets, and the trailing colon is what marks it as a label. Named sections can then be arranged into a reusable &#039;&#039;&#039;song structure&#039;&#039;&#039; (e.g. Verse 1 – Chorus – Verse 2 – Chorus – Bridge – Chorus).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Line comments and musical instructions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A line that consists &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; of text wrapped in parentheses, such as &#039;&#039;(repeat 2x)&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;(instrumental)&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;(a cappella)&#039;&#039;, is treated as a &#039;&#039;&#039;comment&#039;&#039;&#039; / musical instruction rather than as lyrics. Parentheses used in the middle of a lyric line are left as ordinary text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Directives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords understands standard chordpro &#039;&#039;&#039;directives&#039;&#039;&#039;, written in curly braces &#039;&#039;&#039;{ … }&#039;&#039;&#039;. These let you add metadata and control formatting. Commonly used ones include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
• Metadata: &#039;&#039;&#039;{title}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{subtitle}&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;{st}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{artist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{composer}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{lyricist}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{copyright}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{key}&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;{te&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Text Formatting ===&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Symbol&lt;br /&gt;
! Meaning&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| *&lt;br /&gt;
| bold&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same character to stop it before line end e.g. &#039;&#039;Song line with *bold* text&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| **&lt;br /&gt;
| italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| ***&lt;br /&gt;
| bold &amp;amp; italic&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| _&lt;br /&gt;
| underline&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the same characters to stop it before line end&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the color before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;red&amp;gt;red text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. Supported color names: blue, brown, cyan, gray, green, magenta, orange, purple, red, white, yellow. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| text highlight color&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop the highlight before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;@yellow&amp;gt;yellow text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;. You can also use custom hex color codes like &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;#@33F3FF&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| font size (zoom)&lt;br /&gt;
| A number sets the font size relative to the normal size. &#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039; (or omitting it) is normal, positive numbers grow the text and negative numbers shrink it — each step is about ±20% (e.g. &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ≈ 120%, &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ≈ 144%, &#039;&#039;-1&#039;&#039; ≈ 83%). Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line, e.g., &#039;&#039;Line contains &amp;lt;2&amp;gt;bigger text&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| combined formatting&lt;br /&gt;
| Color, highlight and font size can be combined in a single tag by separating them with commas, e.g., &#039;&#039;&amp;lt;red,@yellow,2&amp;gt;&#039;&#039; = red text, yellow highlight, font size 2. Use the character &amp;quot;&amp;lt;&amp;quot; to stop it before the end of the line.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More Text formatting options can be found in the Chord bar under &#039;&#039;&#039;Aa&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Text_Format_Options.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ChordPro, Chords Over Lyrics, Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This switch, at the top of the Song Editor, chooses &#039;&#039;&#039;how you write and edit&#039;&#039;&#039; your song. All three are just different views of the &#039;&#039;&#039;same song&#039;&#039;&#039; — when you flip the switch, JustChords converts your content automatically, so you never lose your chords or lyrics. Pick whichever style you are most comfortable editing in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords are written inline, in square brackets, right where they fall in the lyric: &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;[G]Amazing [C]grace, how [G]sweet the sound&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. This is compact, unambiguous, and the format JustChords stores your song in behind the scenes. Best if you like typing quickly or are pasting from a ChordPro source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039;&#039; — Chords sit on their own line, positioned above the words they belong to — the classic look you see on most lyric-and-chord websites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
G           C        G&lt;br /&gt;
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
: Best if you are copying charts from the web or prefer to see chords and lyrics on separate lines. (Note: &#039;&#039;&#039;Preview&#039;&#039;&#039; is not available in this mode; switching to Preview temporarily returns you to ChordPro.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — A grid-based editor where you place chords on individual &#039;&#039;&#039;beats within each measure&#039;&#039;&#039;, using the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]]. Instead of aligning chords to words, you map them to the rhythm — ideal for instrumental sections, jams, or any chart where the timing of chord changes matters more than the lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039;&#039; You can switch back and forth freely while working. A song entered as Chords Over Lyrics can be viewed and refined as ChordPro at any time, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard, letting you easily insert chords, tabs diagrams, note symbols, rhythm diagrams, sheet music and images into your chart. If you have set the songs Key, the quick chord bar will populate the bar with the chords in that key. As you add additional chord syntax, these new chords will appear on the bar making it easier to insert repeatedly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Quick_Chord_Bar.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
To insert a chord or empty tab into your song sheet:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap on the screen where you want to place the cursor. The cursor is where your entry will be placed.&lt;br /&gt;
* With your cursor positioned, simply tap the desired chord, tab or symbol on the quick chord bar. &lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;[chord]&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol inserts the correct format for writing chords in  chord-pro syntax allowing you to enter any chord you choose.&lt;br /&gt;
* The &#039;&#039;&#039;|tab|&#039;&#039;&#039; symbol enters a blank tabular outline with standard tuning shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Quick Chord Bar &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; Button ===&lt;br /&gt;
On the right hand side of the quick chord bar is a &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon. Tapping the &amp;quot;+&amp;quot; icon opens a menu offering the option to insert diagrams and images into your song sheet.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_More_Options.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== ABC Notation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ABC notation is a compact, text-based way to write sheet music using ordinary letters, numbers, and symbols. In JustChords, you can add ABC notation to a song to display real musical staves — notes, rhythms, time signatures, and lyrics — alongside your chords. Each section of the score starts with header fields (such as the tune title, meter, and default note length) followed by the music itself. Notes are written as letters A–G, with octaves, sharps, flats, and note lengths added using simple markers. Bar lines, repeats, and chord symbols can all be included directly in the text. Lyrics are aligned to the melody using dedicated &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;w:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; lines beneath each staff. JustChords renders your ABC text into a clean musical score that appears in the song&#039;s Sheet Music view. Guitar tablature can also be generated automatically from the same notation. Because it is plain text, ABC notation is easy to type, edit, copy, and share. For hands-on samples you can copy into your own songs, see [[ABC Notation Examples]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Image Insert ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert a picture into a song from the Song Editor. Open the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu in the editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Image&#039;&#039;&#039; (photo icon), then pick one or more photos.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Each selected image is copied into the app&#039;s own storage, so the song keeps working even if the original photo is later moved or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;
* An &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: src=...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive is inserted at the current cursor position, one per image; the image renders inline at that point in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can select &#039;&#039;&#039;multiple&#039;&#039;&#039; images at once — they are inserted in order.&lt;br /&gt;
* Images are stored at up to &#039;&#039;&#039;2000&amp;amp;nbsp;px&#039;&#039;&#039; wide.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the image is just a directive in the song text, you can move it by cutting and pasting the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{image: ...}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line to another spot in the editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Break ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A section break splits one section into two separate blocks at the point you choose. Place the cursor where you want the split and pick &#039;&#039;&#039;Section break&#039;&#039;&#039; from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu; it inserts a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Everything before the directive stays with the section&#039;s original label; the part after the break becomes its own block with &#039;&#039;&#039;no repeated section name&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can add several breaks to divide one section into multiple blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
* Because it is just a &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{section_break}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; line in the song text, you can move or delete it in the editor at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is useful for splitting a long section (for example, a lengthy verse) so it wraps more neatly across columns or pages without duplicating the section heading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord Beats ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats lets you set how many beats each chord lasts, so the chart shows the rhythm of the chord changes — not just which chords are played, but for how long. Select &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; from the syntax switch at the top of the editor to enter this mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How it works:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a chord to select it; the selected chord is underlined in orange.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;−&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons in the bottom toolbar to add or remove a beat from the selected chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; (‹) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; (›) to move the selection from chord to chord.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are shown next to each chord and are grouped according to the song&#039;s [[#Song Measure|time signature]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Keyboard shortcuts:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↑&#039;&#039;&#039; — add a beat — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ↓&#039;&#039;&#039; — remove a beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ →&#039;&#039;&#039; — next chord — &#039;&#039;&#039;⌘ ←&#039;&#039;&#039; — previous chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats edits the same song as the other syntaxes; switching away converts your beat counts back into the stored song automatically. It works best on a song that already has its chords in place — add or edit the chords in ChordPro or Chords Over Lyrics first, then switch to Chord Beats to set their timing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Lyrics Projection Override ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lyrics Projection Override lets you set exactly what text a section shows in &#039;&#039;&#039;[[Lyrics Projection]]&#039;&#039;&#039; — the audience/presentation view — independent of how that section appears in the normal chord chart. Use it when the projected wording should differ from the editor content: to drop chords, expand abbreviated repeats, fix line breaks for the screen, or show a translation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Insert it from the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; menu (under &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039;). It adds a block:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{start_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
Text to be projected in LyricsView&lt;br /&gt;
Second line&lt;br /&gt;
{end_of_lyrics_override}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Replace the placeholder lines with the exact text you want projected for that section.&lt;br /&gt;
* Each line in the block becomes a projected line, so you control the line breaks directly.&lt;br /&gt;
* The override affects &#039;&#039;&#039;only&#039;&#039;&#039; the Lyrics Projection view — the chords, lyrics, and chart in the editor and Song Overview are unchanged.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the block is left empty, the section falls back to its normal lyrics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Guitar Tabs ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Guitar Tabs inserts a blank tablature template you can fill in by typing fret numbers. Open the editor&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;+&#039;&#039;&#039; (insert) menu and pick an instrument under the &#039;&#039;&#039;Guitar Tabs&#039;&#039;&#039; section; the tab lines are added at the cursor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* One line is inserted per string, labeled with that string&#039;s tuning note (for example &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;e / B / G / D / A / e&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for a standard guitar, or &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;G / C / E / A&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; for ukulele), each followed by a row of dashes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Type fret numbers onto the dashes to write your tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* The instruments offered are your available fretted instruments (guitars and ukulele); if the song has a specific instrument set, it is listed first.&lt;br /&gt;
* Templates start longer on iPad and shorter on iPhone — extend a line by typing more dashes as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rhythm diagram ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram_2.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
In JustChords, you can create rhythm patterns, such as guitar strumming patterns, or make your own rythm patterns for other instruments using our &#039;&#039;&#039;Action&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;&#039; characters.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Rhythm_Diagram.png|250px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let’s see how Actions and Modifiers can be used to create a strumming pattern for guitarists. &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;–&#039;&#039;&#039; (dash) for take no action on time line = a space &lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;D&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a down arrow in time line = a down strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;U&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts an up arrow in time line = an up strum&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;X&#039;&#039;&#039; inserts a ⊗ symbol in time line = a muted strum&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You are not limited to these actions. You can use any other &#039;&#039;&#039;uppercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character to represent your own action requirements. The selected character will appear on the time signature time line, where ever you choose to place it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Modifier characters:&#039;&#039;&#039; These are used to “modify” a chosen action, for example, to accent a strum to indicate a hard or loud strum. One or more Modifiers are placed immediately after an Action character, as needed, and when saved, will appear above the related action symbol  or letter in the timing diagram. Available modifiers are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  accent or make loud&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;&amp;lt;&#039;&#039;&#039;  soften or mute&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;p&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;pm&#039;&#039;&#039; palm (for mute strum)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;b&#039;&#039;&#039; for base note or root note&lt;br /&gt;
* any other &#039;&#039;&#039;lowercase&#039;&#039;&#039; character including #, +&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The selected characters and symbols will appear above their related actions on the time signature time where you chose to place them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Details =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Details_Tab.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
Manage and view details relating to your song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Audio Track ===&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Audio_Playback.png|400px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Audio playback in JustChords lets you attach a backing track or reference recording to any song and control it directly from the song detail screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Select Audio track.&lt;br /&gt;
* Choose the source for audio playback, one of:&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Apple Music&#039;&#039;&#039; track&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;YouTube&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Spotify&#039;&#039;&#039; (on iPhone/iPad)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;Local file&#039;&#039;&#039; (for example an mp3 stored in Files)&lt;br /&gt;
** &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to clear the currently selected track&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After this, a small play quick button appears in the song detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once an audio track is attached, playback is always just one tap away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use the play quick button in the song detail to start or stop audio playback.&lt;br /&gt;
The selected track will play while you view the song, so you can practice or perform along with the original recording or a custom backing track.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section Metadata ===&lt;br /&gt;
Song metadata such as titles, composer, lyricist, notes etc, allows you to record song details in your song sheet. In addition you can enter:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* a URL to create a link from your Song title to a utube url.&lt;br /&gt;
* a Footer that will appear on printed song-sheets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Section CCLI ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can enter music and video copyright details used to serve the 250,000 churches (schools and organisations) who use them in worship.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Sheet Music = &lt;br /&gt;
Sheet music allows you to load pdf files and or images. You may add, reposition or delete individual files on your sheet music. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sheet_Music.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap Sheet Music on the menu bar. If you have no sheet music loaded a window appears with an Add File button.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap ‘Add File’ to open a file browser. Another window opens, allowing you to choose from;&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;File:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens a file browser to search for and import pdf files. You can select single or multiple files. You can access this search multiple times.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Scanner:&#039;&#039;&#039; Scanner opens your camera app (requires permission), and allows you to capture documents with your camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Photo library:&#039;&#039;&#039; Opens your Photo gallery and allows you to select and import one or more files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reposition or delete sheet music ===&lt;br /&gt;
When the sheet music contains one or more files you have the option to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Add pages&#039;&#039;&#039; – tap Add and choose File, Scanner or image.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Reorder pages&#039;&#039;&#039; (files) by selecting a page then moving it to the left or to the right.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Delete pages&#039;&#039;&#039; by selecting individual files or choose Delete All.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tab: Preview =&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Preview.png|400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Preview menu allows you to quickly view song sheet in song view mode without closing the Edit screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It offers two views:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song sheet view: See how you chords and lyrics look with formatting&lt;br /&gt;
* Sheet music view: See how your pdf files will look without closing the edit window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Tools = &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tools.png|500px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Rewrite into key == &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The rewrite into key menu option allows you to transpose the song’s content.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Make sure that song has set correct key (the field near note icon).&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Rewrite&#039;&#039;&#039; into key from menu.&lt;br /&gt;
# Select new song key.&lt;br /&gt;
# Song content is rewritten into the new key.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: You can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content. Use &#039;&#039;&#039;Transpose&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Capo&#039;&#039;&#039; for temporary changes of song key. See [[Song_Viewing|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tidy ... ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Tidy.png|500px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Minor Chords &amp;amp;rarr; Xm ===&lt;br /&gt;
When a song uses Dmin or D- as its minor key notation, you can convert it to your preferred format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Trim Whitespaces ===&lt;br /&gt;
Using Trim Whitespaces will eliminate unnecessary white spaces in the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: # &amp;amp;rarr; ♯, [b] &amp;amp;rarr; [B♭] ===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all occurrences of # or b with the prettier version.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chords: is &amp;amp;rarr; #, es &amp;amp;rarr; ♭===&lt;br /&gt;
This feature replaces all chord occurrences with &amp;quot;is&amp;quot; to ♯ (Example: Cis major -&amp;gt; C♯m) as well as chords with &amp;quot;es&amp;quot; to ♭ (Example: Ges Minor -&amp;gt; G♭)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Convert … ==&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Convert.png|600px|right]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Convert “Chords over lyrics &amp;amp;rarr; ChordPro” ===&lt;br /&gt;
“Chords over lyrics” are other common way to write chord charts. It means writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics &#039;&#039;&#039;using spaces&#039;&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Paste song content with “Chords over lyrics”&lt;br /&gt;
# Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Convert ‘Chords over Lyrics’ to ChordPro&#039;&#039;&#039; in menu&lt;br /&gt;
# Song is converted to JustChord notation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Chord pro directives &amp;amp;rarr; attributes ===&lt;br /&gt;
Converts Chordpro’s &#039;&#039;&#039;‘directives’&#039;&#039;&#039; to JustChord’s &#039;&#039;&#039;attributes&#039;&#039;&#039; format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OnSong text formatting &amp;amp;rarr; JustChords ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to covert songs written in OnSong’s text format to JustChord’s format.o&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== {comment:Verse} &amp;amp;rarr; Verse: ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this menu to convert syntax for verse written as &#039;&#039;&#039;{comment:Verse}&#039;&#039;&#039;, to JustChord’s Verse syntax  which is written as &#039;&#039;&#039;Verse:&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preferences ==&lt;br /&gt;
The song editor offers users several options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can adjust the size of the text within the text editor to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable the Text focus mode which takes away the focus from Chords and makes text easier to find for edit&lt;br /&gt;
* You can enable Chord suggestions, which will suggest the appropriate keys in the Quick Chord bar&lt;br /&gt;
* You can set the number of chords allowed to show on the quick chord menu bar. From JustChords perspective, the maximum technically allowed is 20. Screenshot shows option with dropdown to limit the number.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Song_Editor_Preferences.png||400px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Search and Replace ==&lt;br /&gt;
* TODO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Keyboard Shortcuts =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + S ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this shortcuts to save changes to a song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== CMD + 1,2,3,4... ===&lt;br /&gt;
Use shortcut CMD + 1 to insert the 1st suggested Chord from the Quick Chord Bar. Use CMD + 2 for the 2nd and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Web Editor =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; lets you edit a song in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network as your device running JustChords. Changes sync in real time in both directions — edits made in the browser appear instantly in JustChords, and edits made in JustChords appear instantly in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Web_Editor.png|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to start the Web Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song you want to edit.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap the &#039;&#039;&#039;…&#039;&#039;&#039; (more) menu in the Song Editor toolbar and choose &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;, or open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Toggle &#039;&#039;&#039;Web Editor&#039;&#039;&#039; on.&lt;br /&gt;
# A URL appears — open it in any browser on the same Wi-Fi network.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server runs on port &#039;&#039;&#039;8080&#039;&#039;&#039;. Two addresses are shown:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;justchords.local:8080&#039;&#039;&#039; — works in Safari and Chrome via mDNS/Bonjour; the easiest address to type.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;192.168.x.x:8080&#039;&#039;&#039; — the numeric IP fallback if mDNS is unavailable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The server stops automatically when you close the Song Editor or toggle it off. Only one song can be edited at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Interface ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Top bar ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Element&lt;br /&gt;
! Description&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;JustChords&#039;&#039;&#039; logo&lt;br /&gt;
| Animated indicator that the server is active.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connection dot&lt;br /&gt;
| Red = disconnected, green = connected to JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark / Light&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Toggles dark and light mode. Preference is saved in the browser.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Opens the syntax reference panel (see [[#Syntax reference panel|below]]).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Song header ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fields at the top of the page — &#039;&#039;&#039;Title&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Artist&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Key&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;BPM&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Duration&#039;&#039;&#039; — mirror the song&#039;s metadata. Editing any field syncs it back to JustChords within 300 ms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Editor area ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The main text area is where you write chords and lyrics using [[SongEditor#Writing_lyrics_and_chords|ChordPro syntax]]. Syntax highlighting uses the same colours as the JustChords app:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords&#039;&#039;&#039; — highlighted in your chosen chord colour (set in JustChords preferences).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Directives&#039;&#039;&#039; — orange, matching &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;{curly brace}&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; directives.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Comments&#039;&#039;&#039; — grey, for lines wrapped in parentheses &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;(like this)&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section labels&#039;&#039;&#039; — grey, for lines ending in a colon such as &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;Verse:&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The status bar at the bottom shows the current line and column number and the total character count.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Syntax reference panel ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Help&#039;&#039;&#039; to open a quick-reference panel on the right side of the screen. It covers chords, chord comments, sections, line comments, directives, text formatting, ABC notation, and more. A link at the bottom of the panel points to the full [[SongEditor]] wiki page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Press &#039;&#039;&#039;Escape&#039;&#039;&#039; or click &#039;&#039;&#039;Close&#039;&#039;&#039; to dismiss the panel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The editor supports standard keyboard shortcuts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Shortcut&lt;br /&gt;
! Action&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Tab&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Insert four spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;Escape&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Close the Help panel (if open).&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changes are sent to JustChords automatically after a 300 ms pause. There is no manual save button — the song is kept in sync continuously.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== No song open ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no song is currently open in the JustChords editor, or the Song Editor has been closed, the browser shows a &#039;&#039;&#039;No song open&#039;&#039;&#039; overlay. The overlay disappears as soon as a song is opened on the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dark mode ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Web Editor supports dark and light mode independently of the system setting. Click &#039;&#039;&#039;Dark&#039;&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;&#039;Light&#039;&#039;&#039; in the top bar to switch. The preference is stored in the browser&#039;s local storage and persists across sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Requirements ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* JustChords running on iPhone or iPad (iOS 16 or later).&lt;br /&gt;
* The browser device must be on the &#039;&#039;&#039;same Wi-Fi network&#039;&#039;&#039; as the iOS device.&lt;br /&gt;
* Any modern browser: Safari, Chrome, Firefox, Edge.&lt;br /&gt;
* For the &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; address: Safari on macOS/iOS, or Chrome 88+. If the address does not resolve, use the numeric IP shown in the Web Editor settings panel instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Troubleshooting ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Problem&lt;br /&gt;
! Solution&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Page does not load&lt;br /&gt;
| Make sure both devices are on the same Wi-Fi network. Try the numeric IP address instead of &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;justchords.local&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; does not resolve&lt;br /&gt;
| Use the numeric IP address. mDNS may be blocked on some enterprise or guest Wi-Fi networks.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Connection dot stays red&lt;br /&gt;
| Reload the browser page. If the problem persists, toggle the Web Editor off and on in JustChords.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Changes in browser are not saved&lt;br /&gt;
| Check that the connection dot is green. If the WebSocket disconnected, edits made while offline are lost — reconnect and re-enter.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Port 8080 is already in use&lt;br /&gt;
| Another app on your device is using port 8080. Quit that app and restart the Web Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Related topics ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Getting started with JustChords]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=412</id>
		<title>Chord Beats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=412"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:43:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; show the duration of each chord in your song. Each chord is annotated with its beat count, so musicians can see at a glance when to change chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats0.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats1.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats2.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats3.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling Chord Beats ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats are hidden by default. Enable them in the [[SongViewer]] settings before assigning beats to chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Song View&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a &#039;&#039;&#039;Style&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; — each chord is followed by small dots (•) for each beat; chords longer than 8 beats show a number (e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12•&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Stacks&#039;&#039;&#039; — beats are stacked vertically below each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Pills&#039;&#039;&#039; — beat count shown as a compact pill badge on each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Timeline&#039;&#039;&#039; — chords are laid out on a horizontal timeline bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;&#039;&#039;Stacks&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Pills&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Timeline&#039;&#039;&#039; styles you can also set &#039;&#039;&#039;Bars per line&#039;&#039;&#039; to control how many bars fit on one row.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also override this setting per song from the song&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Song-Specific Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; panel (the &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; toggle under song overrides).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Editing Beat Counts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign beats to chords using the [[SongEditor]]&#039;s Chord Beats mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the top toolbar, switch the syntax picker from &#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The editor renders every chord in the song with its current beat count. A style picker appears next to the syntax picker so you can preview a different display style while editing.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap a chord to select it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the bottom toolbar to adjust the selected chord:&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Previous&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ←&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Minus&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↓&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (decrease beats, minimum 0)&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Plus&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↑&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; (increase beats)&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Next&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ →&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Switch syntax or close the editor — beat values are written back into the song automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are stored per chord, so they survive transposition and capo changes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats = 0&#039;&#039;&#039; hides the beat indicator for that chord while keeping the chord itself.&lt;br /&gt;
* Chord Beats data is also used by &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; (Settings → Chord Beats Sync) to drive MIDI clock / AUv3 transport, send chords as MIDI notes, and auto-scroll the song in real time.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=411</id>
		<title>Chord Beats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=411"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:41:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; show the duration of each chord in your song. Each chord is annotated with its beat count, so musicians can see at a glance when to change chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats0.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats1.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats2.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats3.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling Chord Beats ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats are hidden by default. Enable them in the [[SongViewer]] settings before assigning beats to chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Song View&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll to the &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; section.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Show&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Choose a &#039;&#039;&#039;Style&#039;&#039;&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Dots&#039;&#039;&#039; — each chord is followed by small dots (•) for each beat; chords longer than 8 beats show a number (e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12•&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Stacks&#039;&#039;&#039; — beats are stacked vertically below each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Pills&#039;&#039;&#039; — beat count shown as a compact pill badge on each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;Timeline&#039;&#039;&#039; — chords are laid out on a horizontal timeline bar.&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;&#039;&#039;Stacks&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Pills&#039;&#039;&#039;, and &#039;&#039;&#039;Timeline&#039;&#039;&#039; styles you can also set &#039;&#039;&#039;Bars per line&#039;&#039;&#039; to control how many bars fit on one row.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=410</id>
		<title>Chord Beats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=410"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:38:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; show the duration of each chord in your song. Each chord is followed by small dots (•) indicating how many beats it lasts, so musicians can see at a glance when to change chords. Chords longer than 8 beats are shown as a number followed by a single dot (e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12•&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats0.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats1.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats2.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats3.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling Chord Beats ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats are hidden by default. Enable them in the [[SongViewer]] settings before assigning beats to chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Song View&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll to the chord display section.&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# (Optional) Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide full measures (dots)&#039;&#039;&#039; to suppress dots for chords that already last a full measure (i.e. their beat count matches the song&#039;s time signature). Only non-default durations will be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also override this setting per song from the song&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Song-Specific Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; panel (the &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; toggle under song overrides).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assigning Beats to Chords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Chord Beats are visible, use the [[SongEditor]] to set the duration of each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Open the song and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# In the editor, switch the syntax picker from &#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# The editor renders every chord in the song with its current beat count drawn as dots underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
# Tap a chord to select it — an orange underline marks the active chord.&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the bottom toolbar to adjust:&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;◁ Previous chord&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ←&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;− Decrease beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↓&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;+ Increase beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↑&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;▷ Next chord&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ →&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Leave the Chord Beats editor (or switch syntax) and the new beat values are written back into the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are stored per chord, so they survive transposition and capo changes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats = 0&#039;&#039;&#039; hides the dot for that chord while keeping the chord itself.&lt;br /&gt;
* Chord Beats data is also used by &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; (Settings → Chord Beats Sync) to drive MIDI clock / AUv3 transport, send chords as MIDI notes, and auto-scroll the song in real time.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=409</id>
		<title>Chord Beats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=409"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:37:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;# Chord Beats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
**Chord Beats** show the duration of each chord in your song. Each chord is followed by small dots (•) indicating how many beats it lasts, so musicians can see at a glance when to change chords. Chords longer than 8 beats are shown as a number followed by a single dot (e.g. `12•`).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
## Enabling Chord Beats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats are hidden by default. Enable them in the Song Viewer settings before assigning beats to chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open **Settings → Song View**.&lt;br /&gt;
2. Scroll to the chord display section.&lt;br /&gt;
3. Turn on **Show Chord Beats**.&lt;br /&gt;
4. (Optional) Turn on **Hide full measures (dots)** to suppress dots for chords that already last a full measure (i.e. their beat count matches the song&#039;s time signature). Only non-default durations will be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also override this setting per song from the song&#039;s **Song-Specific Preferences** panel (the **Chord Beats** toggle under song overrides).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
## Assigning Beats to Chords&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Chord Beats are visible, use the Song Editor to set the duration of each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Open the song and tap **Edit**.&lt;br /&gt;
2. In the editor, switch the syntax picker from *ChordPro* / *Chords Over Lyrics* to **Chord Beats**.&lt;br /&gt;
3. The editor renders every chord in the song with its current beat count drawn as dots underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
4. Tap a chord to select it — an orange underline marks the active chord.&lt;br /&gt;
5. Use the bottom toolbar to adjust:&lt;br /&gt;
   - **◁ Previous chord** — `⌘ ←`&lt;br /&gt;
   - **− Decrease beats** — `⌘ ↓`&lt;br /&gt;
   - **+ Increase beats** — `⌘ ↑`&lt;br /&gt;
   - **▷ Next chord** — `⌘ →`&lt;br /&gt;
6. Leave the Chord Beats editor (or switch syntax) and the new beat values are written back into the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
## Tips&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Beat counts are stored per chord, so they survive transposition and capo changes.&lt;br /&gt;
- Setting **Beats = 0** hides the dot for that chord while keeping the chord itself.&lt;br /&gt;
- Chord Beats data is also used by **Chord Beats Sync** (Settings → Chord Beats Sync) to drive MIDI clock / AUv3 transport, send chords as MIDI notes, and auto-scroll the song in real time.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats0.png&amp;diff=408</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats0.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats0.png&amp;diff=408"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:34:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats3.png&amp;diff=407</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats3.png&amp;diff=407"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:34:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Marekpalka uploaded a new version of File:ChordBeats3.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats2.png&amp;diff=406</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats2.png&amp;diff=406"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:34:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Marekpalka uploaded a new version of File:ChordBeats2.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats1.png&amp;diff=405</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats1.png&amp;diff=405"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:34:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: Marekpalka uploaded a new version of File:ChordBeats1.png&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=404</id>
		<title>Chord Beats</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats&amp;diff=404"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:31:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Chord Beats&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; show the duration of each chord in your song. Each chord is followed by small dots (•) indicating how many beats it lasts, so musicians can see at a glance when to change chords. Chords longer than 8 beats are shown as a number followed by a single dot (e.g. &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;12•&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats1.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats2.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeats3.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Enabling Chord Beats ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats are hidden by default. Enable them in the [[SongViewer]] settings before assigning beats to chords.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Song View&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
Scroll to the chord display section.&lt;br /&gt;
Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Show Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
(Optional) Turn on &#039;&#039;&#039;Hide full measures (dots)&#039;&#039;&#039; to suppress dots for chords that already last a full measure (i.e. their beat count matches the song&#039;s time signature). Only non-default durations will be drawn.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also override this setting per song from the song&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Song-Specific Preferences&#039;&#039;&#039; panel (the &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039; toggle under song overrides).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assigning Beats to Chords ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once Chord Beats are visible, use the [[SongEditor]] to set the duration of each chord.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open the song and tap &#039;&#039;&#039;Edit&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
In the editor, switch the syntax picker from &#039;&#039;ChordPro&#039;&#039; / &#039;&#039;Chords Over Lyrics&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
The editor renders every chord in the song with its current beat count drawn as dots underneath.&lt;br /&gt;
Tap a chord to select it — an orange underline marks the active chord.&lt;br /&gt;
Use the bottom toolbar to adjust:&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;◁ Previous chord&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ←&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;− Decrease beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↓&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;+ Increase beats&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ ↑&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#* &#039;&#039;&#039;▷ Next chord&#039;&#039;&#039; — &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;⌘ →&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave the Chord Beats editor (or switch syntax) and the new beat values are written back into the song.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat counts are stored per chord, so they survive transposition and capo changes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats = 0&#039;&#039;&#039; hides the dot for that chord while keeping the chord itself.&lt;br /&gt;
* Chord Beats data is also used by &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; (Settings → Chord Beats Sync) to drive MIDI clock / AUv3 transport, send chords as MIDI notes, and auto-scroll the song in real time.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats2.png&amp;diff=403</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats2.png&amp;diff=403"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:30:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats1.png&amp;diff=402</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats1.png&amp;diff=402"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:30:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats3.png&amp;diff=401</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeats3.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeats3.png&amp;diff=401"/>
		<updated>2026-07-31T11:30:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats_Sync&amp;diff=387</id>
		<title>Chord Beats Sync</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Chord_Beats_Sync&amp;diff=387"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:15:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Chord Beats Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; drives JustChords from an external clock so the app follows the music in real time. As the clock advances, JustChords highlights the active chord and section, auto-scrolls the song, and sends MIDI out to other instruments / apps based on the chord under the playhead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This feature builds on [[Chord Beats]] — every chord must have a beat duration set, otherwise there is nothing to follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeatsSync1.png&lt;br /&gt;
File:chordBeatsSync2.png&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Clock Source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords gets its timing in two different ways depending on how it is running:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Standalone app (iOS, macOS Catalyst)&#039;&#039;&#039; — reads an external &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; source or follows the built-in &#039;&#039;&#039;Metronome&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;AUv3 plug-in&#039;&#039;&#039; — locks to the host&#039;s transport (DAW play/stop, position, tempo).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Open &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Chord Beats → Chord Beats Sync&#039;&#039;&#039; to configure the source.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync is off by default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Select a source to activate it. Changing the source to any non-off value immediately re-initialises the sync data for the current song — no need to navigate away and back.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Beats Source picker (standalone only)&lt;br /&gt;
Choose one of:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; — sync disabled (default).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Metronome&#039;&#039;&#039; — the built-in JustChords metronome drives chord sync. Start the metronome and it will advance the song together with the click track.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; — an external MIDI Clock source drives the sync. A device picker appears below the source picker when this option is selected. Only ports that can send (sources / source-and-destination) are listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;AUv3&lt;br /&gt;
* No clock picker — the host transport drives the sync automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Loop Song&lt;br /&gt;
* When the song ends, sync restarts from the beginning of the first section so the song loops indefinitely. Works in all modes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Metronome as Clock Source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Setting &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats Source → Metronome&#039;&#039;&#039; uses the JustChords built-in metronome to advance Chord Beats Sync — no external MIDI device or DAW required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
How it works:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Start the metronome from the Metronome tool panel. Chord sync begins at the same instant as the first audio click.&lt;br /&gt;
* The metronome&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Count-In&#039;&#039;&#039; beats are respected: the song does not advance during the count-in bars, so the first section fires together with beat 1 of the actual pattern.&lt;br /&gt;
* Beat timing is anchored to the audio engine&#039;s hardware clock (mach_absolute_time), so the chord highlight and the click land on the same sample — there is no software loop drift.&lt;br /&gt;
* Stopping the metronome stops chord sync and clears the section selection.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Metronome → Send MIDI Clock (independent setting)&lt;br /&gt;
The metronome also has a separate toggle — &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings → Metronome → Send MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; — that broadcasts 24 PPQ MIDI Clock pulses to connected MIDI ports. This is independent of whether Chord Beats Sync is on or off:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Send MIDI Clock ON, Beats Source = Metronome&#039;&#039;&#039; — the metronome clicks advance both Chord Beats Sync in the app AND drives external gear with a MIDI clock signal.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Send MIDI Clock ON, Beats Source = MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; (or Off) — the metronome sends MIDI clock to external gear only; chord sync is driven by the external MIDI clock (or disabled).&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Send MIDI Clock OFF, Beats Source = Metronome&#039;&#039;&#039; — chord sync advances with the metronome, but no MIDI clock is broadcast.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In all cases where Send MIDI Clock is on, pulses are scheduled inline by the audio engine&#039;s tick scheduler (sample-accurate timestamps referenced to the same audio timeline as the metronome clicks), replacing the earlier software-loop approach. This makes the outgoing MIDI clock more stable at high tempos and long sessions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI Clock Source ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats Source → MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; is selected, JustChords listens to an incoming MIDI Clock signal (24 PPQ) from any connected device or app. The device picker lists only ports that transmit MIDI (sources and source-and-destination ports). Choose &#039;&#039;&#039;None&#039;&#039;&#039; to leave the MIDI clock source unset while keeping sync in MIDI Clock mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== MIDI Out ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Chord Beats Sync can broadcast what is happening in the song over MIDI. The MIDI Out settings are only visible when MIDI is enabled (Settings → MIDI → Enable MIDI). The standalone app has &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Out&#039;&#039;&#039; (one channel); the AUv3 plug-in has both &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Out 1&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;MIDI Out 2&#039;&#039;&#039;, each configured independently.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;User MIDI Messages (always on for Out 1)&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords always emits these on the primary output:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Song is displayed&lt;br /&gt;
* Section selection&lt;br /&gt;
* Section deselection&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Button events&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These are the &amp;quot;user-driven&amp;quot; messages that do not depend on the playhead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Chords (per output)&lt;br /&gt;
Choose how chord data is sent:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; — no chord messages.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chords (Note On/Off)&#039;&#039;&#039; — sends each chord as standard MIDI Note On / Note Off events, so any synth or sampler can play along.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Tone Packet Protocol&#039;&#039;&#039; — sends chord information as TonePacket messages, useful for receivers that understand chord identity rather than raw notes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Anticipation (per output)&lt;br /&gt;
How early chord-change messages should be sent before the beat the chord actually starts on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Off&#039;&#039;&#039; — fire exactly on the beat.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;1/4 beat&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;1/8 beat&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;1/16 beat&#039;&#039;&#039; — send the chord change slightly ahead, useful so external instruments have time to react and do not sound late. Anticipation is ignored for the very first beat of a section (no pre-roll).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Send first chord on song display / section select&lt;br /&gt;
* When enabled, opening a song or selecting a section immediately emits its first chord — handy for hearing the starting chord before the transport begins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Shifting Section MIDI Messages (Delay / Anticipation) ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;Section selection&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Section deselection&#039;&#039;&#039; MIDI messages can be shifted in beats so they do not fire exactly on the section boundary. The offset is set per MIDI action in the song&#039;s &#039;&#039;&#039;Arrangement / Song Structure&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;only takes effect in Chord Beats Sync mode&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;How to Set It&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit the song&#039;s Song Structure and open a MIDI action item.&lt;br /&gt;
* Pick a &#039;&#039;&#039;Trigger&#039;&#039;&#039; — &#039;&#039;Section selection&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Section deselection&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* A stepper (0–100 beats) appears, labelled &#039;&#039;&#039;Delay&#039;&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;&#039;Anticipation&#039;&#039;&#039; depending on the trigger.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Behavior&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section selection → Delay&#039;&#039;&#039; — sends the message &#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039; beats &#039;&#039;&#039;after&#039;&#039;&#039; the section starts.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Section deselection → Anticipation&#039;&#039;&#039; — sends the message &#039;&#039;N&#039;&#039; beats &#039;&#039;&#039;before&#039;&#039;&#039; the section ends.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039; (default) — fires exactly on the boundary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The offset is measured in whole beats on the Chord Beats timeline and is applied per MIDI action, so several actions on the same section can use different shifts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What Sync Does in the UI ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the clock is running:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The chord currently sounding is highlighted in the song view.&lt;br /&gt;
* The active section is highlighted, and JustChords auto-scrolls to keep it on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
* When the section ends, JustChords advances to the next section automatically; if &#039;&#039;&#039;Loop Song&#039;&#039;&#039; is on it wraps back to the start.&lt;br /&gt;
* When the transport stops, all sounding notes are released and the section selection clears.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Section Navigation Over MIDI ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
While sync is active you can pre-queue a different section:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Tap a section header in the song view to set it as the &amp;quot;next section&amp;quot;. When the current section ends, JustChords switches to it and emits the corresponding Section Selection MIDI message.&lt;br /&gt;
* Looping a single section keeps repeating it until you queue a different one or stop the transport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Tips ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Set Chord Beats first.&#039;&#039;&#039; Without beat counts there is nothing for the clock to follow. Enable Chord Beats in Song View settings and assign beat values per chord in the Song Editor&#039;s Chord Beats syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Metronome source&#039;&#039;&#039; is the quickest way to try the feature without any external gear — tap the metronome to start, and the song follows.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;AUv3 in a DAW&#039;&#039;&#039; is the simplest way to lock to a project timeline — start playback in the DAW and the song will follow.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Standalone with external gear&#039;&#039;&#039; (drum machine, sequencer, MIDI clock app) — use Beats Source → MIDI Clock and select the device.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Chord Beats Sync is off by default.&#039;&#039;&#039; Open Settings → Chord Beats → Chord Beats Sync and select a source to activate it.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Send MIDI Clock&#039;&#039;&#039; (metronome setting) and &#039;&#039;&#039;Beats Source&#039;&#039;&#039; (chord sync setting) are independent. You can broadcast a MIDI clock to outboard gear regardless of which source is driving chord sync, and vice versa.&lt;br /&gt;
* If anticipation makes external instruments fire too early, lower it; if they sound late, raise it.&lt;br /&gt;
* MIDI Out settings (Song MIDI and Chord data) only appear when MIDI is enabled under Settings → MIDI.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeatsSync2.png&amp;diff=386</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeatsSync2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeatsSync2.png&amp;diff=386"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:15:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeatsSync1.png&amp;diff=385</id>
		<title>File:ChordBeatsSync1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:ChordBeatsSync1.png&amp;diff=385"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:15:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=384</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=384"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:07:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Welcome to the JustChords Wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Welcome to the JustChords Wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is your home base for everything related to JustChords — the modern, musician‑friendly app for managing chord charts, lyrics, setlists, and live‑performance workflows. Whether you&#039;re a worship leader, gigging guitarist, keyboard player, or band tech, this site will help you get the most out of JustChords on stage, in rehearsal, and at home.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=70px heights=154 perrow=10 mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore1.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore2.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore3.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore4.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore5.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore6.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore7.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore8.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore9.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore10.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is JustChords? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is an app for cataloging and performing songs with chords, lyrics, tabs, and sheet music across iPhone, iPad, and Mac, with iCloud keeping your library in sync. You can import songs from the web or other apps, write your own, and build a personal library that is always with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Song Library&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor|Song Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Import|Song Import]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongViewer|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Tags|Song Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Artists|Song Artists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Structure|Song Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Annotations|Song Annotations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists|Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Folders|Folders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Features&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Autoscroll|Autoscroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AudioUnit plugin|AudioUnit plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Audio Tracks|Audio Tracks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bluetooth Pedal|Bluetooth Pedal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capo &amp;amp; Transpose|Capo &amp;amp; Transpose]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Library|Chord Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats|Chord Beats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats Sync|Chord Beats Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Guitar Strumming|Guitar Strumming]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Localization|Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner|Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MIDI|MIDI]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PlayTogether|PlayTogether]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projection|Projection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration|Sharing &amp;amp; Collaboration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tools|Tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Get in touch|Get in touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team|Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Current Pipeline|Dev Pipeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Release Notes|Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[New Features|New Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Donation|Donation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQs|FAQs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Merch|Merch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Testimonials|Testimonials]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Videos|Videos]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Who is this for? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is built for musicians who want a clean, reliable tool instead of a cluttered all‑in‑one monster. Typical users include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Worship leaders and church bands using iPads on music stands&lt;br /&gt;
* Solo artists and cover bands playing in bars, restaurants, and small venues&lt;br /&gt;
* Songwriters and home‑studio users running JustChords as an AUv3 plugin in DAWs like Logic Pro, GarageBand, or AUM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your old workflow was a heavy binder full of printed chord sheets, this wiki will show you how to replace it with a streamlined digital setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Key features at a glance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords brings together everything you need to run a full show from a single device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Song tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Transpose, capo, “rewrite into key” for quick key changes&lt;br /&gt;
: Autoscroll for hands‑free performance&lt;br /&gt;
: Chord buttons to audition voicings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Setlists and events with per‑setlist arrangements and settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Lyrics projection via AirPlay with customizable colors, backgrounds, and fonts&lt;br /&gt;
: Bluetooth / MIDI pedal support for hands‑free navigation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Practice &amp;amp; studio&lt;br /&gt;
: Built‑in metronome and tuner&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio tracks from files, URLs, Apple Music, and Spotify, with integrated playback control&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio Unit plugin mode to send chords as MIDI into your DAW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contribute &amp;amp; connect ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is community‑driven: examples, screenshots, and workflows from real musicians are welcome as the content grows. If you have tips, tricks, or questions, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Explore feature pages and how‑to guides here on &#039;&#039;&#039;wiki.justchords.app&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add notes about your own setups, shortcuts, and best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As JustChords evolves with new features, this wiki will track changes, best practices, and advanced setups—so bookmark it and check back regularly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=383</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=383"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:02:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Welcome to the JustChords Wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Welcome to the JustChords Wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is your home base for everything related to JustChords — the modern, musician‑friendly app for managing chord charts, lyrics, setlists, and live‑performance workflows. Whether you&#039;re a worship leader, gigging guitarist, keyboard player, or band tech, this site will help you get the most out of JustChords on stage, in rehearsal, and at home.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=100px heights=216 perrow=10 mode=&amp;quot;nolines&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore1.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore2.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore3.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore4.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore5.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore6.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore7.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore8.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore9.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore10.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is JustChords? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is an app for cataloging and performing songs with chords, lyrics, tabs, and sheet music across iPhone, iPad, and Mac, with iCloud keeping your library in sync. You can import songs from the web or other apps, write your own, and build a personal library that is always with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Song Library&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor|Song Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Import|Song Import]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongViewer|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Tags|Song Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Artists|Song Artists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Structure|Song Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Annotations|Song Annotations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists|Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Folders|Folders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Features&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Autoscroll|Autoscroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AudioUnit plugin|AudioUnit plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Audio Tracks|Audio Tracks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bluetooth Pedal|Bluetooth Pedal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capo &amp;amp; Transpose|Capo &amp;amp; Transpose]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Library|Chord Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats|Chord Beats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats Sync|Chord Beats Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Guitar Strumming|Guitar Strumming]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Localization|Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner|Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MIDI|MIDI]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PlayTogether|PlayTogether]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projection|Projection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration|Sharing &amp;amp; Collaboration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tools|Tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Get in touch|Get in touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team|Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Current Pipeline|Dev Pipeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Release Notes|Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[New Features|New Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Donation|Donation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQs|FAQs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Merch|Merch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Testimonials|Testimonials]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Videos|Videos]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Who is this for? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is built for musicians who want a clean, reliable tool instead of a cluttered all‑in‑one monster. Typical users include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Worship leaders and church bands using iPads on music stands&lt;br /&gt;
* Solo artists and cover bands playing in bars, restaurants, and small venues&lt;br /&gt;
* Songwriters and home‑studio users running JustChords as an AUv3 plugin in DAWs like Logic Pro, GarageBand, or AUM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your old workflow was a heavy binder full of printed chord sheets, this wiki will show you how to replace it with a streamlined digital setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Key features at a glance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords brings together everything you need to run a full show from a single device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Song tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Transpose, capo, “rewrite into key” for quick key changes&lt;br /&gt;
: Autoscroll for hands‑free performance&lt;br /&gt;
: Chord buttons to audition voicings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Setlists and events with per‑setlist arrangements and settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Lyrics projection via AirPlay with customizable colors, backgrounds, and fonts&lt;br /&gt;
: Bluetooth / MIDI pedal support for hands‑free navigation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Practice &amp;amp; studio&lt;br /&gt;
: Built‑in metronome and tuner&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio tracks from files, URLs, Apple Music, and Spotify, with integrated playback control&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio Unit plugin mode to send chords as MIDI into your DAW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contribute &amp;amp; connect ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is community‑driven: examples, screenshots, and workflows from real musicians are welcome as the content grows. If you have tips, tricks, or questions, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Explore feature pages and how‑to guides here on &#039;&#039;&#039;wiki.justchords.app&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add notes about your own setups, shortcuts, and best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As JustChords evolves with new features, this wiki will track changes, best practices, and advanced setups—so bookmark it and check back regularly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=382</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=382"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T15:00:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Welcome to the JustChords Wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Welcome to the JustChords Wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is your home base for everything related to JustChords — the modern, musician‑friendly app for managing chord charts, lyrics, setlists, and live‑performance workflows. Whether you&#039;re a worship leader, gigging guitarist, keyboard player, or band tech, this site will help you get the most out of JustChords on stage, in rehearsal, and at home.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;gallery widths=100px perrow=10&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore1.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore2.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore3.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore4.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore5.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore6.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore7.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore8.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore9.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
File:appstore10.jpeg&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/gallery&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What is JustChords? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is an app for cataloging and performing songs with chords, lyrics, tabs, and sheet music across iPhone, iPad, and Mac, with iCloud keeping your library in sync. You can import songs from the web or other apps, write your own, and build a personal library that is always with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Song Library&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor|Song Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Import|Song Import]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongViewer|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Tags|Song Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Artists|Song Artists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Structure|Song Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Annotations|Song Annotations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists|Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Folders|Folders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Features&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Autoscroll|Autoscroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AudioUnit plugin|AudioUnit plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Audio Tracks|Audio Tracks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bluetooth Pedal|Bluetooth Pedal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capo &amp;amp; Transpose|Capo &amp;amp; Transpose]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Library|Chord Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats|Chord Beats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats Sync|Chord Beats Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Guitar Strumming|Guitar Strumming]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Localization|Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner|Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MIDI|MIDI]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PlayTogether|PlayTogether]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projection|Projection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration|Sharing &amp;amp; Collaboration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tools|Tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Get in touch|Get in touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team|Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Current Pipeline|Dev Pipeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Release Notes|Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[New Features|New Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Donation|Donation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQs|FAQs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Merch|Merch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Testimonials|Testimonials]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Videos|Videos]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Who is this for? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is built for musicians who want a clean, reliable tool instead of a cluttered all‑in‑one monster. Typical users include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Worship leaders and church bands using iPads on music stands&lt;br /&gt;
* Solo artists and cover bands playing in bars, restaurants, and small venues&lt;br /&gt;
* Songwriters and home‑studio users running JustChords as an AUv3 plugin in DAWs like Logic Pro, GarageBand, or AUM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your old workflow was a heavy binder full of printed chord sheets, this wiki will show you how to replace it with a streamlined digital setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Key features at a glance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords brings together everything you need to run a full show from a single device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Song tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Transpose, capo, “rewrite into key” for quick key changes&lt;br /&gt;
: Autoscroll for hands‑free performance&lt;br /&gt;
: Chord buttons to audition voicings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Setlists and events with per‑setlist arrangements and settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Lyrics projection via AirPlay with customizable colors, backgrounds, and fonts&lt;br /&gt;
: Bluetooth / MIDI pedal support for hands‑free navigation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Practice &amp;amp; studio&lt;br /&gt;
: Built‑in metronome and tuner&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio tracks from files, URLs, Apple Music, and Spotify, with integrated playback control&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio Unit plugin mode to send chords as MIDI into your DAW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contribute &amp;amp; connect ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is community‑driven: examples, screenshots, and workflows from real musicians are welcome as the content grows. If you have tips, tricks, or questions, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Explore feature pages and how‑to guides here on &#039;&#039;&#039;wiki.justchords.app&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add notes about your own setups, shortcuts, and best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As JustChords evolves with new features, this wiki will track changes, best practices, and advanced setups—so bookmark it and check back regularly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=381</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=381"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:32:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Welcome to the JustChords Wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Welcome to the JustChords Wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is your &#039;&#039;&#039;home base&#039;&#039;&#039; for everything related to JustChords – the modern, musician‑friendly app for managing chord charts, lyrics, setlists, and live performance workflows. Whether you are a worship leader, gigging guitarist, keyboard player, or band tech, this site will help you get the most out of JustChords on stage, in rehearsal, and at home.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:appstore1.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore2.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore3.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore4.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore5.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore6.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore7.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore8.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore9.jpeg|100px]][[File:appstore10.jpeg|100px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== What is JustChords? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is an app for cataloging and performing songs with chords, lyrics, tabs, and sheet music across iPhone, iPad, and Mac, with iCloud keeping your library in sync. You can import songs from the web or other apps, write your own, and build a personal library that is always with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Song Library&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor|Song Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Import|Song Import]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongViewer|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Tags|Song Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Artists|Song Artists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Structure|Song Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Annotations|Song Annotations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists|Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Folders|Folders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Features&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Autoscroll|Autoscroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AudioUnit plugin|AudioUnit plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Audio Tracks|Audio Tracks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bluetooth Pedal|Bluetooth Pedal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capo &amp;amp; Transpose|Capo &amp;amp; Transpose]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Library|Chord Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats|Chord Beats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats Sync|Chord Beats Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Guitar Strumming|Guitar Strumming]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Localization|Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner|Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MIDI|MIDI]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PlayTogether|PlayTogether]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projection|Projection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration|Sharing &amp;amp; Collaboration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tools|Tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Get in touch|Get in touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team|Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Current Pipeline|Dev Pipeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Release Notes|Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[New Features|New Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Donation|Donation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQs|FAQs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Merch|Merch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Testimonials|Testimonials]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Videos|Videos]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Who is this for? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is built for musicians who want a clean, reliable tool instead of a cluttered all‑in‑one monster. Typical users include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Worship leaders and church bands using iPads on music stands&lt;br /&gt;
* Solo artists and cover bands playing in bars, restaurants, and small venues&lt;br /&gt;
* Songwriters and home‑studio users running JustChords as an AUv3 plugin in DAWs like Logic Pro, GarageBand, or AUM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your old workflow was a heavy binder full of printed chord sheets, this wiki will show you how to replace it with a streamlined digital setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Key features at a glance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords brings together everything you need to run a full show from a single device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Song tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Transpose, capo, “rewrite into key” for quick key changes&lt;br /&gt;
: Autoscroll for hands‑free performance&lt;br /&gt;
: Chord buttons to audition voicings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Setlists and events with per‑setlist arrangements and settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Lyrics projection via AirPlay with customizable colors, backgrounds, and fonts&lt;br /&gt;
: Bluetooth / MIDI pedal support for hands‑free navigation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Practice &amp;amp; studio&lt;br /&gt;
: Built‑in metronome and tuner&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio tracks from files, URLs, Apple Music, and Spotify, with integrated playback control&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio Unit plugin mode to send chords as MIDI into your DAW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contribute &amp;amp; connect ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is community‑driven: examples, screenshots, and workflows from real musicians are welcome as the content grows. If you have tips, tricks, or questions, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Explore feature pages and how‑to guides here on &#039;&#039;&#039;wiki.justchords.app&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add notes about your own setups, shortcuts, and best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As JustChords evolves with new features, this wiki will track changes, best practices, and advanced setups—so bookmark it and check back regularly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=380</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=Main_Page&amp;diff=380"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:31:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: /* Welcome to the JustChords Wiki */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= Welcome to the JustChords Wiki =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is your &#039;&#039;&#039;home base&#039;&#039;&#039; for everything related to JustChords – the modern, musician‑friendly app for managing chord charts, lyrics, setlists, and live performance workflows. Whether you are a worship leader, gigging guitarist, keyboard player, or band tech, this site will help you get the most out of JustChords on stage, in rehearsal, and at home.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:appstore1.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore2.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore3.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore4.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore5.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore6.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore7.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore8.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore9.jpeg|400px]][[File:appstore10.jpeg|400px]]&lt;br /&gt;
== What is JustChords? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is an app for cataloging and performing songs with chords, lyrics, tabs, and sheet music across iPhone, iPad, and Mac, with iCloud keeping your library in sync. You can import songs from the web or other apps, write your own, and build a personal library that is always with you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Song Library&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongEditor|Song Editor]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Import|Song Import]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SongViewer|Song Viewer]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Tags|Song Tags]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Artists|Song Artists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Structure|Song Structure]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Song Annotations|Song Annotations]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Setlists|Setlists]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Folders|Folders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Features&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Autoscroll|Autoscroll]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[AudioUnit plugin|AudioUnit plugin]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Audio Tracks|Audio Tracks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Bluetooth Pedal|Bluetooth Pedal]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capo &amp;amp; Transpose|Capo &amp;amp; Transpose]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Library|Chord Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats|Chord Beats]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Chord Beats Sync|Chord Beats Sync]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Guitar Strumming|Guitar Strumming]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Localization|Localization]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner|Metronome &amp;amp; Tuner]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[MIDI|MIDI]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PlayTogether|PlayTogether]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projection|Projection]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Collaboration|Sharing &amp;amp; Collaboration]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tools|Tools]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----------------&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Get in touch|Get in touch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Team|Team]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Current Pipeline|Dev Pipeline]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Release Notes|Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[New Features|New Features]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Donation|Donation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQs|FAQs]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Merch|Merch]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Testimonials|Testimonials]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Videos|Videos]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Who is this for? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords is built for musicians who want a clean, reliable tool instead of a cluttered all‑in‑one monster. Typical users include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Worship leaders and church bands using iPads on music stands&lt;br /&gt;
* Solo artists and cover bands playing in bars, restaurants, and small venues&lt;br /&gt;
* Songwriters and home‑studio users running JustChords as an AUv3 plugin in DAWs like Logic Pro, GarageBand, or AUM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your old workflow was a heavy binder full of printed chord sheets, this wiki will show you how to replace it with a streamlined digital setup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Key features at a glance ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
JustChords brings together everything you need to run a full show from a single device:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Song tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Transpose, capo, “rewrite into key” for quick key changes&lt;br /&gt;
: Autoscroll for hands‑free performance&lt;br /&gt;
: Chord buttons to audition voicings&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Live tools&lt;br /&gt;
: Setlists and events with per‑setlist arrangements and settings&lt;br /&gt;
: Lyrics projection via AirPlay with customizable colors, backgrounds, and fonts&lt;br /&gt;
: Bluetooth / MIDI pedal support for hands‑free navigation&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
; Practice &amp;amp; studio&lt;br /&gt;
: Built‑in metronome and tuner&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio tracks from files, URLs, Apple Music, and Spotify, with integrated playback control&lt;br /&gt;
: Audio Unit plugin mode to send chords as MIDI into your DAW&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contribute &amp;amp; connect ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This wiki is community‑driven: examples, screenshots, and workflows from real musicians are welcome as the content grows. If you have tips, tricks, or questions, you can:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Explore feature pages and how‑to guides here on &#039;&#039;&#039;wiki.justchords.app&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add notes about your own setups, shortcuts, and best practices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As JustChords evolves with new features, this wiki will track changes, best practices, and advanced setups—so bookmark it and check back regularly.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore1.jpeg&amp;diff=379</id>
		<title>File:Appstore1.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore1.jpeg&amp;diff=379"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore2.jpeg&amp;diff=378</id>
		<title>File:Appstore2.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore2.jpeg&amp;diff=378"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore3.jpeg&amp;diff=377</id>
		<title>File:Appstore3.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore3.jpeg&amp;diff=377"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore4.jpeg&amp;diff=376</id>
		<title>File:Appstore4.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore4.jpeg&amp;diff=376"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:43Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore5.jpeg&amp;diff=375</id>
		<title>File:Appstore5.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore5.jpeg&amp;diff=375"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:42Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore6.jpeg&amp;diff=374</id>
		<title>File:Appstore6.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore6.jpeg&amp;diff=374"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore7.jpeg&amp;diff=373</id>
		<title>File:Appstore7.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore7.jpeg&amp;diff=373"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore8.jpeg&amp;diff=372</id>
		<title>File:Appstore8.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore8.jpeg&amp;diff=372"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore9.jpeg&amp;diff=371</id>
		<title>File:Appstore9.jpeg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.justchords.app/index.php?title=File:Appstore9.jpeg&amp;diff=371"/>
		<updated>2026-07-27T14:30:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marekpalka: File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;File uploaded with MsUpload&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marekpalka</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>